summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/16048-h
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorRoger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org>2025-10-15 04:48:03 -0700
committerRoger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org>2025-10-15 04:48:03 -0700
commit4b7cccd0fda6521d26202488ced9d0741c39fde4 (patch)
treec03e05c26c4e770f17ad6efb3e0d8592b4886e44 /16048-h
initial commit of ebook 16048HEADmain
Diffstat (limited to '16048-h')
-rw-r--r--16048-h/16048-h.htm9015
-rw-r--r--16048-h/images/image001.jpgbin0 -> 68320 bytes
-rw-r--r--16048-h/images/image002.jpgbin0 -> 46851 bytes
-rw-r--r--16048-h/images/image003.jpgbin0 -> 60235 bytes
-rw-r--r--16048-h/images/image004.jpgbin0 -> 46488 bytes
-rw-r--r--16048-h/images/image005.jpgbin0 -> 69069 bytes
-rw-r--r--16048-h/images/image1.pngbin0 -> 26898 bytes
7 files changed, 9015 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/16048-h/16048-h.htm b/16048-h/16048-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c55929c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16048-h/16048-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,9015 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+ "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+ <head>
+ <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" />
+ <title>
+ The Project Gutenberg eBook of Troop One Of The Labrador, by Dillon Wallace.
+ </title>
+ <style type="text/css">
+/*<![CDATA[ XML blockout */
+<!--
+ p { margin-top: .75em;
+ text-align: justify;
+ margin-bottom: .75em;
+ }
+ h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 {
+ text-align: center; /* all headings centered */
+ clear: both;
+ }
+ hr { width: 65%;
+ margin-top: 2em;
+ margin-bottom: 2em;
+ margin-left: auto;
+ margin-right: auto;
+ clear: both;
+ }
+
+ body{margin-left: 10%;
+ margin-right: 10%;
+ }
+
+ .blockquot{margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 10%;}
+ .pagenum {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: smaller; text-align: right;} /* page numbers */
+
+ .center {text-align: center;}
+ .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;}
+
+ .caption {font-weight: bold;}
+
+ .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;}
+
+ ul.TOC { list-style-type: none;
+ position: relative;
+ width: 85%; }
+
+ ul.LOI { list-style-type: none;
+ position: relative;
+ width: 85%; }
+
+ span.ralign { position: absolute; right: 0; top: auto;}
+ // -->
+ /* XML end ]]>*/
+ </style>
+ </head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Troop One of the Labrador, by Dillon Wallace
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Troop One of the Labrador
+
+Author: Dillon Wallace
+
+Release Date: June 13, 2005 [EBook #16048]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TROOP ONE OF THE LABRADOR ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Wallace McLean, Diane Monico, and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p class="figcenter" style="width: 373px;">
+<img src="images/image1.png" width="373" height="600" alt="TROOP ONE OF THE LABRADOR" title="TROOP ONE OF THE LABRADOR" />
+</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1"></a></p>
+<h1>TROOP ONE OF THE LABRADOR</h1>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+
+<h2><i>The Talbot Baines Series</i></h2><p><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2"></a></p>
+
+<p class="center">With fine attractive new wrappers</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+<span class="smcap">The Fifth Form At St. Dominic's.</span> By Talbot Baines Reed<br />
+<span class="smcap">The Adventures Of A Three-guinea Watch.</span> By Talbot Baines Reed<br />
+<span class="smcap">The Cock-house At Fellsgarth.</span> By Talbot Baines Reed<br />
+<span class="smcap">A Dog With A Bad Name.</span> By Talbot Baines Reed<br />
+<span class="smcap">The Master Of The Shell.</span> By Talbot Baines Reed<br />
+<span class="smcap">The School Ghost, And Boycotted.</span> By Talbot Baines Reed<br />
+<span class="smcap">The Silver Shoe.</span> By Major Charles Gilson<br />
+<span class="smcap">The Treasure Of Tregudda.</span> By Argyll Saxby<br />
+<span class="smcap">The Two Captains Of Tuxford.</span> By Frank Elias<br />
+<span class="smcap">The Riders From The Sea.</span> By G. Godfray Sellick<br />
+<span class="smcap">A Son Of The Dogger.</span> By Walter Wood<br />
+<span class="smcap">A Fifth Form Mystery.</span> By Harold Avery<br />
+<span class="smcap">A Scout Of The '45.</span> By E. Charles Vivian<br />
+<span class="smcap">From Slum To Quarter-deck.</span> By Gordon Stables<br />
+<span class="smcap">Comrades Under Canvas.</span> By F.P. Gibbon</p>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>For Complete List see Catalogue</i>)</p>
+
+<p class="center"><small>OF All BOOKSELLERS</small></p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+
+<p><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3"></a></p>
+<p class="figcenter" style="width: 752px;">
+<img src="images/image001.jpg" width="752" height="500" alt="IT WAS DR. JOE BEYOND A DOUBT!" title="IT WAS DR. JOE BEYOND A DOUBT!" />
+<span class="caption">IT WAS DR. JOE BEYOND A DOUBT!</span></p>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4"></a></p>
+<h1>TROOP ONE OF THE
+LABRADOR<br /><br /><br /><br /></h1>
+
+<h3>BY</h3>
+
+<h2>DILLON WALLACE</h2>
+
+<p class="center">AUTHOR OF "GRIT-A-PLENTY," "THE RAGGED<br />
+INLET GUARDS," ETC., ETC.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></p>
+
+
+<p class="center">THE "BOY'S OWN PAPER" OFFICE</p>
+
+<p class="center"><small><span class="smcap">4 Bouverie Street And 65 St. Paul's Churchyard, E.c.4</span></small><br /><br /><br /></p>
+
+<p class="center"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5"></a><small>MADE IN GREAT BRITAIN<br />
+<i>Printed by</i><br />
+UNWIN BROTHERS, LIMITED<br />
+LONDON AND WOKING</small>
+</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6"></a></p>
+
+<h2>CONTENTS</h2>
+
+<ul class="TOC">
+<li><span class="ralign">Page</span><br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_I"><b>I. DOCTOR JOE, SCOUTMASTER</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_9">9</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_II"><b>II. PLANS</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_37">37</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_III"><b>III. "'TIS THE GHOST OF LONG JOHN"</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_51">51</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_IV"><b>IV. SHOT FROM BEHIND</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_63">63</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_V"><b>V. LEM HORN'S SILVER FOX</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_71">71</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_VI"><b>VI. THE TRACKS IN THE SAND</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_94">94</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_VII"><b>VII. THE MYSTERY OF THE BOAT</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_109">109</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII"><b>VIII. TRAILING THE HALF-BREED</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_120">120</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_IX"><b>IX. ELI SURPRISES INDIAN JAKE</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_126">126</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_X"><b>X. THE END OF ELI'S HUNT</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_135">135</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XI"><b>XI. THE LETTER IN THE CAIRN</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_147">147</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XII"><b>XII. THE HIDDEN CACHE</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_165">165</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII"><b>XIII. SURPRISED AND CAPTURED</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_179">179</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV"><b>XIV. THE TWO DESPERADOS</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_192">192</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XV"><b>XV. MISSING!</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_198">198</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XVI"><b>XVI. BOUND AND HELPLESS</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_206">206</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XVII"><b>XVII. LOST IN A BLIZZARD</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_220">220</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII"><b>XVIII. A PLACE TO "BIDE"</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_232">232</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XIX"><b>XIX. SEARCHING THE WHITE WILDERNESS</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_240">240</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XX"><b>XX. "WOLVES!" YELLED ANDY</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_251">251</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XXI"><b>XXI. THE ALARM IN THE NIGHT</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_259">259</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XXII"><b>XXII. THE IMMUTABLE LAW OF GOD</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_268">268</a></span>
+<br /><br /></li>
+</ul>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7"></a></p>
+<h2>ILLUSTRATIONS</h2>
+
+<ul class="LOI">
+
+<li><a href="#Page_3">IT WAS DR. JOE BEYOND A DOUBT!</a><span class="ralign"><i>Frontispiece</i></span><br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><span class="ralign">Facing Page</span><br /></li>
+<li><a href="#Page_70a">STRETCHED UPON THE FLOOR LAY LEM HORN</a><span class="ralign">70</span><br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#Page_104a">ON THE RIGHT SEETHED THE DEVIL'S TEA KETTLE</a><span class="ralign">104</span><br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#Page_132a">"YOU STAND WHERE YOU IS AND DROP YOUR GUN!"</a><span class="ralign">132</span><br /><br /></li>
+
+<li><a href="#Page_260a">IT WAS A FIGHT TO THE DEATH</a><span class="ralign">260</span><br /><br /></li>
+</ul>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h1><a name="Troop_One_of_the_Labrador" id="Troop_One_of_the_Labrador"></a>Troop One of the Labrador</h1>
+<p><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9"></a><br /><br /><br /></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I"></a>CHAPTER I</h3>
+
+<h2>DOCTOR JOE, SCOUTMASTER</h2>
+
+
+<p>"Doctor Joe! Doctor Joe's comin'!
+He just turned the p'int!"</p>
+
+<p>Jamie Angus burst into the cabin at The
+Jug breathlessly shouting this joyful news,
+and then rushed out again with David and
+Andy at his heels.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, Doctor Joe! It can't be Doctor Joe,
+now! Can it, Pop? It must be some one
+else Jamie sees! It can't be Doctor Joe,
+<i>what</i>ever!" exclaimed Margaret in a great
+flutter of excitement.</p>
+
+<p>"Jamie's keen at seein'! He'd know anybody
+as far as he can see un!" assured Thomas,
+no less excited at the news than was Margaret.
+"But 'tis strange that he's comin' back so
+soon!"</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10"></a>Of course Margaret, who was laying the
+table for supper, must needs follow the boys;
+and Thomas, who was leaning over the wash
+basin removing the grime of the day's toil,
+snatched the towel from its peg behind the
+door and, drying his hands as he ran, sacrificing
+dignity to haste, followed Margaret, who had
+joined the three boys at the end of the jetty
+which served as a boat landing.</p>
+
+<p>A skiff had just entered the narrow channel
+which connected The Jug, as the bight where
+the Anguses lived was called, with the wider
+waters of Eskimo Bay. There could be no
+doubt, even at that distance, that the tall
+man standing aft and manipulating the long
+sculling oar, was Doctor Joe. As the little
+group gathered on the jetty he took off his
+hat and waved it high above his head. It
+was Doctor Joe beyond a doubt! The boys
+waved their caps and shouted at the top of
+their lusty young lungs, Margaret, undoing
+her apron, waved it and added her voice to
+the chorus, and Thomas, quite carried away
+by the excitement, waved the towel and in a
+great bellowing voice shouted a louder welcome
+than any of them.</p>
+
+<p>There was no happier or better contented
+<a name="Page_11" id="Page_11"></a>family on all The Labrador than the family
+of Thomas Angus, though they had their trials
+and ups and downs and worries like any other
+family in or out of Labrador.</p>
+
+<p>"Everybody must expect a bit o' trouble
+and worry now and again," Thomas would
+say when things did not go as they should.
+"If we never had un, and livin' were always
+fine and clear, we'd forget to be thankful for
+our blessin's. We has t' have a share o' trouble
+in our lives, and here and there a hard knock
+whatever, t' know how fine the good things
+are and rightly enjoy un when they come.
+And in the end troubles never turn out as
+bad as we're expectin', by half. First and
+last there's a wonderful sight more good times
+than bad uns for all of us."</p>
+
+<p>Thomas had reason to be proud and thankful.
+Jamie could see as well as ever he could, and
+it was all because of Doctor Joe and his wonderful
+operation on Jamie's eyes when it seemed
+certain the lad was to become blind. Through
+the skill of Doctor Joe, Jamie's eyes were
+every whit as keen as David's and Andy's,
+and there were no keener eyes in the Bay
+than theirs.</p>
+
+<p>David was now nearly seventeen and Andy
+<a name="Page_12" id="Page_12"></a>was fifteen&mdash;brawny, broad-shouldered lads who
+had already faced more hardships and had
+more adventures to their credit than fall to
+many a man in a whole lifetime. In that
+brave land adventures are to be found at every
+turn. They bob up unexpectedly, and the
+man or boy who meets them successfully must
+know the ways of the wilderness and must
+be self-reliant and resourceful, must have grit
+a-plenty and a stout heart.</p>
+
+<p>Margaret kept house for the little family, a
+responsibility that had been thrust upon her,
+and which she cheerfully accepted, when her
+mother was laid to rest and she was a wee lass
+of twelve. Now she was eighteen and as
+tidy and cheerful a little housekeeper as could
+be found on the coast, and pretty too, in manner
+as well as in feature. "'Tis the manner that
+counts," said Thomas, and he declared that
+there was no prettier lass to be found on the
+whole Labrador.</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe, whose real name was Joseph
+Carver, was their nearest neighbour at Break
+Cove, ten miles down Eskimo Bay. He had
+come to the coast nine years before, a mysterious
+stranger, nervous and broken in health.
+Thomas gave him shelter at The Jug, helped
+<a name="Page_13" id="Page_13"></a>him build his cabin at Break Cove and taught
+him the ways of the land and how to set his
+traps. Doctor Joe became a trapper like his
+neighbours, and in time, with wholesome living
+in the out-of-doors, regained his health and
+came to love his adopted country and its rugged
+life.</p>
+
+<p>No one knew then that Joseph Carver was
+indeed a doctor, but he was so handy with
+bandages and medicines that the folk of the
+Bay recognized his skill and soon fell, by
+common consent, to calling him "Doctor Joe."</p>
+
+<p>It was a year before our story begins that
+Jamie had first complained of a mist in his eyes.
+With passing weeks the mist thickened, and
+one day Doctor Joe examined the eyes and
+announced that only a delicate and serious
+operation could save the lad's sight. This
+demanded that Jamie be taken to a hospital
+in New York where a specialist might operate.
+It was an expensive undertaking. Neither
+Thomas nor Doctor Joe had the necessary
+money, but Thomas hoped to realize enough
+from his winter's trapping in the interior and
+Doctor Joe was to add the proceeds of his own
+winter's work to the fund. Then Thomas
+broke his leg. Doctor Joe must needs remain
+<a name="Page_14" id="Page_14"></a>at The Jug to care for him, and there seemed
+no hope for Jamie but a life of darkness.</p>
+
+<p>But David was confident that he could take
+his father's place on the trails, and with some
+persuasion, for the need was desperate, Thomas
+consented that David and Andy should spend
+the winter in the great interior wilderness with
+no other companion than Indian Jake, a half-breed.</p>
+
+<p>That was an experience needing the stoutest
+heart. Through long dreary months they faced
+the sub-arctic cold and fearful blizzards that
+swept the wilderness, following silent trails
+over wide white wastes or through the depths
+of dark forests, and falling upon many a wild
+adventure that tried their mettle a hundred
+times. It was a man's job, but they both made
+good, and that is something to be proud of&mdash;to
+make good at the job you tackle.</p>
+
+<p>Jamie had pluck too, but pluck alone could
+not save his eyes. The mist thickened more
+rapidly than Doctor Joe had expected it would,
+and there came a time when Jamie could scarcely
+see at all. Then it was that Doctor Joe
+announced one day before the return of David
+and Andy from the trails, that the operation
+could be no longer delayed if Jamie's eyesight
+<a name="Page_15" id="Page_15"></a>was to be saved, and that to attempt to
+delay it until the ice cleared from the coast
+and the mail boat came to bear him away to
+New York would be fatal.</p>
+
+<p>After making this announcement, Doctor
+Joe revealed the fact that he had once been
+a great eye surgeon. With Thomas's consent
+he offered to perform the operation on Jamie's
+eyes. Thomas had unbounded faith in his
+friend. Doctor Joe operated and Jamie's sight
+was saved.</p>
+
+<p>In curing Jamie, Doctor Joe discovered that
+he himself was cured, and that he was again
+in possession of all his former skill. It was
+quite natural, therefore, that he should wish
+to resume the practice of surgery. He was
+an indifferent trapper, and the living that
+he made following the trails amounted to a
+bare existence. He decided, therefore, that
+it was his duty to himself to return to the
+work for which, during long years of study,
+he had been trained.</p>
+
+<p>Six weeks before Doctor Joe had sailed away
+on the mail boat from Fort Pelican, bound
+for New York, that far distant, mysterious,
+wonderful city of which he had told so many
+marvellous tales. Thomas had grave doubts
+<a name="Page_16" id="Page_16"></a>that they would ever see him again, though
+he had said that he would some day return
+to visit his friends at The Jug and to see his
+own little deserted cabin at Break Cove, where
+he had spent so many lonely but profitable
+years, for it was here that he had rebuilt his
+broken health. He had good reason to love
+the place, and he was quite sure he had no
+better or truer friends in all the world than
+Thomas Angus and his family.</p>
+
+<p>"Thomas," said he at parting, "if I had
+the means to support myself I would stay
+here on The Labrador and be doctor to the
+people that need me, for there are folk enough
+that need a doctor's help up and down the
+coast. But I'm a poor man, and if I stopped
+here I'd have to make my living as a trapper,
+and you know how poor a trapper I've been
+all these years. Back in New York I can
+do much good, and there I can live as I was
+reared to live. But I'll not forget you, Thomas,
+and some day I'll come to see you."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm not doubtin' 'tis best you go and the
+Lord's will," said Thomas. "But we'll be
+missin' you sore, Doctor Joe. I scarce knows
+how we'll get on without you. 'Twill seem
+strange&mdash;almost like you were dead, I'm fearin'."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17"></a>"Thomas," and Doctor Joe's voice trembled
+with emotion, "there's no one in the wide
+world nearer my affections than you and the
+boys and Margaret. It hurts me to go, but
+it's best I should. I might scratch along
+here for a few years, but I was not born to
+the work and the time would come when I'd
+be a burden on some one, and it would make
+me unhappy. I know that I'll wish often
+enough to be back here with you at The Jug."</p>
+
+<p>"You'd never be a burden, <i>what</i>ever!"
+Thomas declared, quite shocked at the suggestion.
+"I feels beholden to you, Doctor Joe.
+There's nary a thing I could ever do to make up
+to you for savin' Jamie's eyes. You made un
+as good as new. He'd ha' been stone blind
+now if 'tweren't for you&mdash;and the mercy o'
+God."</p>
+
+<p>"The mercy of God," Doctor Joe repeated
+reverently.</p>
+
+<p>And here at the end of six weeks was Doctor
+Joe back again. What wonder that Thomas
+Angus and his family were quite beside themselves
+with joy, shouting themselves hoarse
+down there on the jetty.</p>
+
+<p>And presently, when the skiff drew alongside,
+and Doctor Joe stepped out upon the jetty,
+<a name="Page_18" id="Page_18"></a>he was quite overwhelmed with the welcome
+he received.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, Thomas," he said as they walked up
+to the cabin with Jamie clinging to one of his
+hands and Andy to the other, "here I am
+back again, as you see. I couldn't stay away
+from you dear, good people. I may as well
+confess, I was homesick for you before I
+reached New York, and I'm back to stay.
+I found my fortune had been made while I
+was here, and now I can do as I please."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, that's fine now!" exclaimed Margaret.
+"'Tis fine if you're to stay!"</p>
+
+<p>"We were missin' you sore," said Thomas.
+"'Tis like the Lord's blessin' to have you back
+at The Jug!"</p>
+
+<p>"And there's good old Roaring Brook!"
+Doctor Joe stopped for a moment with half
+closed eyes, to listen to the rush of water over
+the rocks, where Roaring Brook tumbled down
+into The Jug. "It's the sweetest music I've
+heard since I left here! And the smell of the
+spruce trees! And such a scene! Thomas,
+my friend, it's a rugged land where we live,
+but it's God's own land, just as He made it,
+beautiful, and undefiled by man!"</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe turned about and stretched his
+<a name="Page_19" id="Page_19"></a>right arm toward the south. Before them lay
+the shimmering placid waters of The Jug,
+reaching away to join the wider, greater waters
+of Eskimo Bay. In the distance, beyond the
+Bay, the snow-capped peaks of the Mealy
+Mountains stood in silent majesty, now reflecting
+the last brilliant rays of the setting sun. As
+they tarried, watching them, the light faded
+and shafts of orange and red rose out of the
+west. The waters became a throbbing expanse
+of colour, and the woods on the Point,
+at the entrance to The Jug, sank into purple.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis a bit of the light of heaven that the
+Lord lets out of evenin's for us to see," said
+Jamie, and perhaps Jamie was right.</p>
+
+<p>"You must be rare hungry, now," observed
+Thomas, as they entered the cabin. "Margaret
+were just puttin' supper on when Jamie
+sights you turnin' the P'int. 'Twill be ready
+in a jiffy."</p>
+
+<p>"What have you got for us, Margaret?"
+asked Doctor Joe. "I believe I am hungry
+for the good things you cook."</p>
+
+<p>"Fried trout, sir," said Margaret.</p>
+
+<p>"Fried trout!" Doctor Joe rolled his eyes
+in mock ecstasy. "It couldn't have been
+better!"</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20"></a>"You always says that, whatever," laughed
+Margaret. "If 'twere just bread and tea I'm
+thinkin' you'd like un fine."</p>
+
+<p>"But trout!" exclaimed Doctor Joe. "Why,
+fresh trout are worth five dollars a pound
+where I've been&mdash;and couldn't be had for
+that!"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, now!" said Margaret in astonishment.
+"And we has un so plentiful!"</p>
+
+<p>David lighted a lamp and Thomas renewed
+the fire, which crackled cheerily in the big
+box stove, while everybody talked excitedly
+and Margaret set on the table a big dish of
+smoking fried trout, a heaping plate of bread,
+and poured the tea.</p>
+
+<p>"Set in! Set in, Doctor Joe!" Thomas
+invited.</p>
+
+<p>And when they drew up to the table, with
+Thomas at one end and Margaret at the other,
+and Doctor Joe and Jamie at Thomas's right,
+and David and Andy at his left, Thomas
+devoutly gave thanks for the return of their
+friend and asked a blessing upon the bounty
+provided.</p>
+
+<p>"Help yourself, now, and don't be afraid
+of un," Thomas admonished, passing the dish
+of trout to Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21"></a>"A real banquet," Doctor Joe declared,
+as he helped himself liberally. "I've eaten
+in some fine places since I've been away, but
+I've had no such feast as this! And there's
+no one in the whole world can fry trout like
+Margaret!"</p>
+
+<p>"You always says that, sir," and Margaret's
+face glowed with pleasure at the compliment.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis true!" declared Doctor Joe. "'Tis
+true!"</p>
+
+<p>"I'm wonderin' now about the trout,"
+remarked David.</p>
+
+<p>"What are you wondering?" asked Doctor
+Joe.</p>
+
+<p>"How folks get along with no trout to eat
+off where you've been, sir."</p>
+
+<p>"There are men who go far out from the
+city and fish in the streams for trout, just
+for the sport of catching them," explained
+Doctor Joe. "They will tramp all day along
+brooks, and feel lucky if they catch a dozen
+little fellows so small we'd not look at them
+here. But it is only the few who do it for
+sport that ever get any at all, and there are
+hundreds of people there who never even
+saw a trout, they catch so very few of
+them."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22"></a>"'Twould seem like a waste o' time," remarked
+Thomas, "if they catches so few.
+I'd never walk all day for a dozen trout unless
+I was wonderful hard up for grub. If I
+were wantin' fish so bad I'd set a net for whitefish
+or salmon, or if there were cod grounds
+about I'd gig for cod, though salmon or cod
+or whitefish would never be takin' the place
+o' good fresh trout with me."</p>
+
+<p>"It's not altogether for the trout the sportsmen
+tramp the streams all day," laughed Doctor
+Joe. "They prize the trout they get as a
+great delicacy, to be sure, but it's the joy of
+getting out into the open that pays them for
+the effort. I've done it myself. They get
+plenty of sea fish, they buy them at the
+shops."</p>
+
+<p>"I never were thinkin' o' that," said Thomas.
+"I'm thinkin', now, that's where all the
+salmon we salts down and sells to the Post
+goes."</p>
+
+<p>The boys were vastly interested, and asked
+many questions, which Doctor Joe answered
+with infinite patience, concerning the various
+kinds of fish people bought in the shops, and
+how the fish were caught and shipped to the
+shops to be sold fresh.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23"></a>"And you'll stay now? You'll not be
+leavin' The Labrador again?" asked Thomas,
+after supper.</p>
+
+<p>"Aye," said Doctor Joe, "I've elected to
+be a Labradorman." Then, turning to the
+boys, he suggested:</p>
+
+<p>"Lads, there are a lot of things in that skiff
+of mine. I wish you'd bring them in. Will
+you do it while your father and I visit?"</p>
+
+<p>The boys were not only glad but eager to
+do it, for there were doubtless many surprises
+for themselves in the skiff, and with one accord
+the three hurried out.</p>
+
+<p>"Years ago, Thomas," said Doctor Joe,
+when the boys were gone, "in my
+days in New York, I invested a little money
+in a mining property. Shortly after I made
+the investment it was said the ore had run out,
+and I believed my money was lost. When I
+returned to New York this summer I found
+that more ore had been found later, and the
+mine had earned me a lot of money. I invested
+what was due to me in such a way that it will
+bring me an income each year sufficient to provide
+me with all I shall ever need."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, but that's fine now!" said Thomas.</p>
+
+<p>"Thomas," Doctor Joe continued "I should
+<a name="Page_24" id="Page_24"></a>not have been able to enjoy this had it not
+been for your kindness to me years ago, when
+I came first to The Labrador a man of broken
+health. If you had not offered me your friendship
+then I should have died an invalid in
+poverty.</p>
+
+<p>"I've thought of this a thousand times. I
+believe God sent me here. I only knew then
+that I came because I sought a secluded spot
+on the earth where I could find relief from
+turmoil. Now, I believe He guided me to
+The Labrador and to The Jug to you. He had
+something for me to do in the world, and this
+was His way of saving me.</p>
+
+<p>"When Jamie needed me I was here, and
+because you had befriended me I was prepared
+with God's help and with my skill and training
+to restore Jamie's eyesight. There are others
+on the coast who need a doctor's skill just as
+Jamie needed it, and they have no one to help
+them. I have decided that I shall be doctor
+to the people. If I can help the folk, as I
+am sure I can, I'll be happy in the knowledge
+that I'm making some little return for the great
+deal that you have done for me."</p>
+
+<p>"I were never doin' much for you, Doctor
+Joe&mdash;just what one man would always do for
+<a name="Page_25" id="Page_25"></a>another," Thomas protested. "But 'twill be
+a blessin' to the folk of The Labrador to have
+you doctor un! We all need doctors often
+enough when there's none to be had, and
+folks die for the need of un."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, folks die here for the need of a doctor,"
+Doctor Joe agreed, "and I hope I may be the
+means of saving lives and giving relief."</p>
+
+<p>The three boys broke in upon them with their
+arms full of packages.</p>
+
+<p>"There's a lot more!" exclaimed Jamie
+depositing his load upon the floor.</p>
+
+<p>"Perhaps we had better help them,
+Thomas," suggested Doctor Joe, rising.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, no, sir," Jamie protested. "Let us
+bring un up!"</p>
+
+<p>And so said David and Andy also. They
+quickly had the contents of the skiff transferred
+to the cabin, and the exciting process of opening
+the packages began.</p>
+
+<p>The first to be opened was for Margaret,
+and it contained many pretty and useful
+things, including two neat, substantial warm
+dresses, finer than any Margaret had ever
+before possessed or seen. Her eyes sparkled
+as she held them up for inspection, and she
+exclaimed over and over again:</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26"></a>"Oh, how wonderful pretty they is!"</p>
+
+<p>For the boys there were innumerable gifts
+dear to boys' hearts, including a compass and
+a watch for each. For Thomas there was
+a fine pair of field-glasses, a compass and a
+very fine watch indeed, and he was as pleased
+and happy as the others.</p>
+
+<p>"The glasses'll be a wonderful help t' me
+in huntin'," he declared. "When I climbs
+hills for a look around I can see deer that I'd
+sure to be missin' with no glasses. I'm not
+doubtin' the compass'll come in handy now
+and again in thick weather."</p>
+
+<p>Then there was a big box of goodies. There
+were such candies as they had never dreamed
+of&mdash;oranges and big red-cheeked apples. Even
+Thomas had never before in his life tasted an
+orange or an apple, and they all declared that
+they had never imagined that anything could
+be so good. It was quite astonishing to learn
+that in the great world from which Doctor
+Joe had come there were people who ate oranges
+and apples every day of their lives if they
+wished them.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis strange the way the Lord fixes things,"
+observed Thomas. "Here now we never saw
+the like of oranges and apples before in all
+<a name="Page_27" id="Page_27"></a>our lives, but we has plenty of trout, and
+there are folks out there that has no trout
+but they all has oranges and apples. We has
+so many trout we forgets how fine they is,
+and what a blessin' 'tis we has un. And I'm
+thinkin' 'tis the same with them folks about
+the oranges and apples."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," agreed Doctor Joe, "it's only when
+things are taken away from us that we really
+appreciate them. Jamie, no doubt, appreciates
+his eyes much more than he would have done
+had the mist never clouded them."</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, 'tis so," said Thomas.</p>
+
+<p>"I dare say," Doctor Joe suggested, "that
+you've never eaten potatoes or onions?"</p>
+
+<p>"No," said Thomas, "I've heard of un,
+but I never eats un. I never had any to eat."</p>
+
+<p>"Well," announced Doctor Joe, "I've had
+several sacks of potatoes and a sack of onions
+and two barrels of apples shipped to Fort
+Pelican with a quantity of other goods. We'll
+have to go with the big boat for them."</p>
+
+<p>The boys and Margaret were quite beside
+themselves with the wonder of it all, and
+Thomas was little less excited.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll go for un to-morrow or the next day
+whatever," said Thomas.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28"></a>There was one box still unopened, and the
+three boys were eyeing it expectantly, when
+Doctor Joe exclaimed:</p>
+
+<p>"Here we've left till the last the most important
+thing of all. Get an axe, David, and
+we'll knock the cover off this box."</p>
+
+<p>David had the axe in a jiffy, and when
+Doctor Joe removed the cover the box was
+found to be filled with books.</p>
+
+<p>"O-h-h!" breathed the boys in unison.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis fine! Oh, I've been wishin' and
+wishin' for books t' look at and read!" exclaimed
+Margaret.</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe had taught them all to read and
+write in the years he had been with them,
+an accomplishment that not every boy and
+girl on The Labrador possessed, for there were
+no schools there.</p>
+
+<p>"There are some books to study and some
+to read. There are story books and books about
+birds and flowers and animals. And here is
+something that I know will please the boys,"
+said Doctor Joe, drawing from the box six
+paper-bound volumes. "There's an interesting
+story attached to these books that I must tell
+you before you look at them, and then we'll
+go through them together.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29"></a>"One day I was walking in a park in New
+York.</p>
+
+<p>"Suddenly I heard a crashing noise, and I
+hurried in the direction in which I heard the
+noise, and turning a corner saw a motor-car
+lying on its side. Some boys wearing khaki-coloured
+uniforms, very much like soldiers'
+uniforms, had already reached the wreck, and
+before I came up with them had rescued two
+injured men. I never saw more efficient or
+prompt service than those boys were giving
+the poor men, who were both badly hurt.
+They had the men stretched out upon the grass.
+One had a severed artery in his arm, where
+the arm had been cut upon the broken glass
+wind shield. The man's blood was pouring
+in great spurts through the wound, but the
+boys were already adjusting the tourniquet,
+for which they used a handkerchief, and in
+a minute they had the bleeding stopped, as
+well as I could have done it. I've no doubt
+they saved the man's life, for without prompt
+help he'd have bled to death in a short time.</p>
+
+<p>"The other man was cut and bruised, and
+the boys were making him as comfortable as
+possible until an ambulance came to take him
+to a hospital. There was really nothing I
+<a name="Page_30" id="Page_30"></a>could do that the boys had not already done
+promptly and remarkably well.</p>
+
+<p>"The instant they had discovered the
+accident two boys had run away to summon
+an ambulance and to notify the police, and
+in a little while an ambulance with a surgeon
+and two policemen came and took the men
+away.</p>
+
+<p>"The boys were only about Andy's age, and
+I wondered at their training and efficiency.
+When the ambulance had gone with the injured
+men I walked a little way with the boys, and
+learned that they belonged to a wonderful
+organization called 'Boy Scouts.' I had heard
+of Boy Scouts, but I supposed it was one of
+the ordinary clubs where boys got together
+just for play.</p>
+
+<p>"I was so much interested that I looked up
+the head office of the Boy Scouts, and asked
+questions about them. Then I bought these
+copies of the <i>Boy Scout's Handbook</i>. They
+tell about the things the scouts do, and how a
+boy may become a scout. I knew you chaps
+would be so interested you would each want
+a book, so I bought a half-dozen copies. The
+extra books we can give to other boys up the
+Bay."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31"></a>"Could we be scouts?" asked Andy breathlessly.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, to be sure!" Doctor Joe smiled.</p>
+
+<p>"'Twould be rare fun, now!" exclaimed
+David.</p>
+
+<p>"All of us scouts, just like the boys in New
+York?" Jamie asked, his face aglow.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," answered Doctor Joe. "I knew you
+chaps would like to be scouts. We'll organize
+a troop, and we'll call it Troop One of The
+Labrador. There are Boy Scouts of America,
+and Boy Scouts of England, and Boy Scouts
+of nearly every country in the world except
+The Labrador. We'll be the Boy Scouts of
+The Labrador, and become a part of the great
+army of scouts. It'll be something to be
+proud of."</p>
+
+<p>"How'll we do it?" asked David.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll be leader, or scoutmaster as they call
+the leader," explained Doctor Joe. "These
+books explain all about the things we're
+to do.</p>
+
+<p>"Before you become tenderfoot scouts you'll
+have to learn some things," Doctor Joe continued,
+after looking through one of the handbooks,
+until he found the proper page. "You
+can tie all the knots already. You do that
+<a name="Page_32" id="Page_32"></a>every day. But there are plenty of boys,
+and men too, where I came from that can't
+even tie the ordinary square knot.</p>
+
+<p>"You'll have to learn the oath and law.
+You live pretty close to the requirements of
+the law now, but it'll be necessary to learn
+it, and I'll explain then what each law means.
+You'll have to learn what the scout badge
+stands for and how it's made up, and other
+things."</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe carefully marked the necessary
+pages and references.</p>
+
+<p>"Now about the flag," said Doctor Joe.
+"You'll have to learn about the formation of
+the flag and what it stands for. This book
+is for the Boy Scouts of America, and the flag
+it refers to is the United States flag. I'm
+an American, but you chaps are living in
+British territory and you're British subjects,
+so you'll have to learn about the British flag
+or Union Jack, as it's called, for that's your
+flag.</p>
+
+<p>"The Union Jack is the national flag of the
+whole British Empire. The English flag was
+originally a red cross on a white field. This
+is called the flag of St. George. Three hundred
+years ago King James the First added to it
+<a name="Page_33" id="Page_33"></a>the banner of Scotland, which was a blue flag
+with a white cross, called St. Andrew's Cross,
+lying upon the blue from corner to corner&mdash;that
+is diagonally."</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe opened his travelling bag and
+drew forth two small flags, one the Stars
+and Stripes and the other the British Union
+Jack.</p>
+
+<p>"I nearly forgot about these," said he,
+spreading the flags upon the table. "This is
+the flag of my country," and he caressed the
+United States flag affectionately. "I love it
+as you should love your flag. The Union
+Jack is the emblem of the great British Empire,
+of which you are a part. It is one of the greatest
+and best countries in the world to live in.
+To be a British subject is something to be
+proud of indeed."</p>
+
+<p>"Aye," broke in Thomas, "'tis that, now."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," continued Doctor Joe, "I want you
+to be as proud of it as I am that I'm a citizen
+of the United States, and I'm so proud of it
+I wouldn't change for any other country in
+the world. When I reached St. John's and
+saw the American flag flying over the office
+of the United States Consulate, my eyes filled
+with tears. I hadn't seen that old flag for
+<a name="Page_34" id="Page_34"></a>years, and I stood in the street for an hour
+doing nothing but look at it and think of all
+it represents. It makes my blood tingle just
+to touch it. You chaps must feel the same
+toward the British flag, for that's your flag.</p>
+
+<p>"Now let me show you how the flag is made
+up," and Doctor Joe proceeded to trace St.
+George's Cross and St. Andrew's Cross, explaining
+them again as he did so. "In the year
+1801 another banner was added. This was the
+Banner of St. Patrick of Ireland. St. Patrick's
+Cross was a red diagonal cross on a white field,
+and here you see it."</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe traced it on the flag.</p>
+
+<p>"There," he went on, "you have the British
+flag complete. No one knows exactly why
+it is called the 'Jack,' but it may have been
+because in the old days, the English knights,
+when they went out to fight their battles, wore
+a jacket over their armour with the St. George's
+Cross upon it, so it would be known to what
+nation they belonged. This jacket was sometimes
+called a 'jack' for short.</p>
+
+<p>"The Union Jack did not become a complete
+flag as we have it to-day until the year 1801,
+when St. Patrick's Cross was added to it.
+The Stars and Stripes, the flag of my country,
+<a name="Page_35" id="Page_35"></a>was first made in 1776, and on June 14, 1777,
+it was adopted by the United States Congress
+as the national emblem, so you see it is even
+older than the British flag. The flags of all
+nations in the world have changed since 1777
+excepting only the United States flag, and
+every American is proud of the fact that his
+flag is older than the flag of any other Christian
+nation in the world."</p>
+
+<p>The boys, and Thomas and Margaret also,
+were fascinated with Doctor Joe's brief story
+of the flags. They were quite excited with
+the thought that they were to be a part of the
+great army of Boy Scouts, and to do the same
+things that other boys in far-away lands were
+doing, and the other boys that they had never
+seen seemed suddenly very much nearer to
+them and more like themselves than they had
+ever seemed before.</p>
+
+<p>The three buried their noses in the handbook,
+now and again asking Doctor Joe
+questions. They were so excited and so interested,
+indeed, that they could scarcely lay
+the books aside when Thomas announced that
+it was time to "turn in," and Andy declared
+he could hardly wait for morning when they
+could be at them again.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36"></a>And so it came about that Troop <span class="smcap">I</span>, Boy
+Scouts of The Labrador, was organized, and
+in the nature of things the troop was destined
+to meet many adventures and unusual experiences.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II"></a>CHAPTER II</h3>
+
+<h2>PLANS</h2>
+
+
+<p>The cabin at The Jug had three rooms.
+There was a square living-room, entered
+through an enclosed porch on its western
+grade. At the end of the living-room opposite
+the entrance were two doors, one leading to
+Margaret's room, the other to the room occupied
+by the boys. Thomas himself slept in a bunk,
+resembling a ship's bunk, built against the
+north wall.</p>
+
+<p>The furnishings of the living-room consisted
+of a home-made table, a big box stove, three
+home-made chairs and some chests, which
+served the double purpose of storage places
+for clothing and seats. A cupboard was built
+against the wall at the left of the entrance,
+and between two windows on the south side
+of the room, which looked out upon The Jug,
+was a shelf upon which Thomas kept his Bible
+<a name="Page_38" id="Page_38"></a>and Margaret her sewing basket&mdash;a little
+basket which she had woven herself from
+native grasses. Behind the stove was a bench,
+upon which stood a bucket of water and the
+family wash basin, and over the basin hung a
+towel for general family use.</p>
+
+<p>Pasted upon the walls were pictures from
+old newspapers and magazines. There were
+no other decorations but these and snowy
+muslin curtains at the windows, but the floor,
+table, chairs&mdash;all the woodwork, indeed&mdash;were
+scoured to immaculate whiteness with sand
+and soap, and everything was spotlessly clean
+and tidy. Despite the austere simplicity of
+the room and its furnishings, it possessed an
+indescribable atmosphere of cosy comfort.</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe's bed was spread upon the floor.
+It was still candle-light when he was awakened
+by Thomas building a fire in the stove, for in
+this land of stern living there is no lolling in
+bed of mornings.</p>
+
+<p>"Good-morning, Thomas," said Doctor Joe,
+with a yawn and a stretch as he sat up.</p>
+
+<p>"Marnin'," said Thomas.</p>
+
+<p>"How's the morning, Thomas, fair for our
+trip to Fort Pelican?"</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, 'tis a fine marnin'," announced
+<a name="Page_39" id="Page_39"></a>Thomas, "but I were thinkin' 'twould be
+better to wait over till to-morrow for the trip.
+After your long voyage 'twould be a bit trying
+for you to turn back to-day to Fort Pelican
+without restin' up, and I'm not doubtin' a
+day whatever'll do no harm to the potaters
+and things."</p>
+
+<p>"I believe you're right, Thomas," and
+Doctor Joe spoke with evident relief. "I
+thought you'd be getting ready for the trapping
+and would like to get the Fort Pelican trip
+out of the way. We'll put the trip off till
+to-morrow."</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe dressed hurriedly, and went out
+to enjoy the cool, crisp morning. Everything
+was white with hoarfrost. The air was
+charged with the perfume of balsam and spruce
+and other sweet odours of the forest. Doctor
+Joe took long, deep, delicious breaths as he
+looked about him at the familiar scene.</p>
+
+<p>The last stars were fading in the growing
+light. A low mist hung over The Jug, and
+beyond the haze lay the dark, heaving waters
+of Eskimo Bay. In the distance beyond the
+Bay the high peaks of the Mealy Mountains
+rose out of the gloom, white with snow and
+looming above the dark forest at their base in
+<a name="Page_40" id="Page_40"></a>cold and silent majesty. Behind the cabin
+stretched the vast, mysterious, unbounded
+wilderness which held, hidden in its unmeasured
+depths, rivers and lakes and mountains that
+no man, save the wandering Indian, had ever
+looked upon&mdash;great solitudes whose silence had
+remained unbroken through the ages.</p>
+
+<p>"If some of those Boy Scouts could only
+see this!" exclaimed Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p>"'Twere fashioned by the Almighty for
+comfortable livin'," said Thomas, who had
+called Margaret and the boys and come out
+unobserved by Doctor Joe. "There's no better
+shelter on the coast, and no better place for
+seals and salmon, with neighbours handy when
+we wants to see un, and plenty o' room to
+stretch. 'Tis the finest <i>I</i> ever saw, whatever."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, 'tis all of that," agreed Doctor Joe.
+"But I wasn't thinking now of The Jug
+alone. I was thinking of the majestic grandeur
+of the whole scene. I was enjoying the
+freedom from the noise and scramble, the
+dirt and smoke and smudge of the city, with
+its piles upon piles of ugly buildings, and
+never a breath of such pure air as this to be
+breathed. I was thinking of these fine young
+chaps, the Boy Scouts I saw there, who are
+<a name="Page_41" id="Page_41"></a>trying to study God's big out-of-doors and
+must content themselves with stingy little
+parks. It's the love of Nature that takes them
+to the parks, and compared with this they
+have a poor substitute. This is the world as
+God made it, with all its primordial beauty.
+We're fortunate that circumstances placed us
+here, Thomas, and we should be for ever
+thankful."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm wonderin' now," observed Thomas,
+as he and Doctor Joe paced up and down the
+gravelly beach, "why folks ever lives in such
+places as you tells about. There's plenty o'
+room down here on The Labrador, and plenty
+o' other places, I'm not doubtin', where they'd
+be free from the crowds and dirt, and have
+plenty o' room to stretch, and live fine like we
+lives."</p>
+
+<p>"We're a thousand miles from a railway,"
+said Doctor Joe. "Most of the people in the
+cities wouldn't live a thousand paces from a
+railway if they could help themselves. They
+take a car and ride if they've only half a mile
+to go. They ride so much they've almost
+forgotten how to walk. They like crowds.
+They'd be lonesome if they were away from
+them."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42"></a>"'Tis strange, wonderful strange, how some
+folks lives," remarked Thomas, quite astonished
+that any could prefer the city to his own big,
+free Labrador. "When folks has enough to
+keep un busy they never gets lonesome, and
+bein' idle is like wastin' a part of life. A man
+could never be lonesome where there's plenty o'
+water and woods about. I always finds jobs
+a-plenty to turn my hand to, and I has no
+time to feel lonesome. And I never could live
+where I didn't have room enough to stretch,
+<i>what</i>ever."</p>
+
+<p>"That's it!" Doctor Joe spoke decisively.
+"Room enough to stretch mind as well as
+body. Why, Thomas, I've often heard men
+say that they had to 'kill time', and didn't
+know what to do with themselves for hours
+together!"</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis wicked and against the Lord's will,"
+and Thomas shook his head. "The Lord
+never wants folks to be idle or kill time. He
+fixes it so there's a-plenty of useful things
+for everybody to do all the time, and they
+wants to do un."</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis the measure of a man's worth,"
+remarked Doctor Joe. "The worth-while man
+never has an hour to kill. The day hasn't
+<a name="Page_43" id="Page_43"></a>hours enough for him. It's the other kind
+that kill time&mdash;the sort that are not, and
+never will be, of much account in the
+world."</p>
+
+<p>They walked a little in silence, each busy
+with his own thoughts, when Thomas remarked:</p>
+
+<p>"The Lord has been wonderful good to me,
+Doctor Joe, givin' me three as fine lads and as
+fine a lass as He ever gave a man. Then He
+saves the little lad's eyes, when they were
+goin' blind, by sendin' you to cure un. And
+when I were breakin' my leg and couldn't work
+He sends along Indian Jake to go to the trails
+to hunt with David and Andy, and they makes
+a fine hunt and keeps us out o' debt. And
+this summer we has as fine a catch of salmon
+as ever we has, and we're through with un a
+fortnight ahead of ever before, with all the
+barrels filled and the gear stowed, and the
+salt salmon traded in at the Post, and plenty
+o' flour and pork and molasses and tea t'
+see us through the winter, <i>what</i>ever."</p>
+
+<p>"Last year at this time things looked pretty
+blue for us," said Doctor Joe, "but everything
+worked out well in the end, Thomas."</p>
+
+<p>"Aye," agreed Thomas, "wonderful well.
+<a name="Page_44" id="Page_44"></a>I'm thinkin' that if we does our best t' help
+ourselves when troubles come the Lord is
+like t' step in and give us a hand. He wants
+us to do the best we can t' help ourselves
+and when He sees we're doin' it He lifts the
+troubles."</p>
+
+<p>"That's true," agreed Doctor Joe, "and if
+a man takes advantage of every opportunity
+that comes to him, and don't waste his time,
+he's pretty sure to succeed."</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, that he is," said Thomas. "Now I
+were thinkin' that the lads worked so wonderful
+hard at the salmon th' summer, I'd let un go
+with you to Fort Pelican t' manage the boat,
+and I'll be staying home to make ready for
+the trail. There's a-plenty to be done yet to
+make ready without hurry, and a trip to Fort
+Pelican will be a rare treat for the lads. But
+I'll go if you wants. I were just askin' if
+'twould be suitin' you if I stays home and lets
+they go?"</p>
+
+<p>"Why, of course! That's great! Simply
+great!" exclaimed Doctor Joe. "The boys
+will make a fine crew! Will Jamie go too?"</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, Jamie's been workin' like a man, and
+he'll be keen for the trip," said Thomas. "And
+last night I were thinkin' after I goes to bed
+<a name="Page_45" id="Page_45"></a>how fine 'tis that you're to be doctor to the
+coast. Indian Jake's to be my trappin'
+pardner th' winter, and the lads'll 'bide home.
+You'll be needin' dogs and komatik (sledge)
+to take you about. There'll be little enough
+for the dogs to do, and you'll be welcome to
+un. The lads can do the drivin' for you and
+whatever you wants un to do. Use un all
+you needs. I wants to do my share to help
+you do the doctorin'."</p>
+
+<p>"Thank you! Thank you, Thomas!"
+Doctor Joe accepted gratefully. "This will
+make it possible for me to see a good many
+people that I otherwise would not be able to
+see, and make it easier for me also."</p>
+
+<p>"Aye," said Thomas, "I were thinkin' that
+too, and the lads will be glad enough to lend
+you a hand when you needs un."</p>
+
+<p>It was broad daylight. While Thomas and
+Doctor Joe talked on the beach, the boys
+had been busily engaged in carrying the
+day's supply of water from Roaring Brook to
+a water barrel in the porch. Now Jamie
+appeared to announce breakfast. While they
+ate the boys were able to talk of little else
+than the scout books, and the fact they were
+to do as boys did in other parts of the world.
+<a name="Page_46" id="Page_46"></a>And they were delighted beyond measure
+when they learned that they were to make
+the voyage to Fort Pelican with Doctor Joe.
+It was an event of vast importance.</p>
+
+<p>"There'll be plenty o' time in the boat to
+study the scout book things," Andy suggested.
+"Maybe now we could learn to be scouts
+before we gets back home."</p>
+
+<p>"I've no doubt you can pass all the tenderfoot
+tests while we're away," said Doctor
+Joe. "And since you're to take me about
+with dogs and komatik this winter when I go
+to visit sick people, there'll be no end of
+chances to show what good scouts you are."</p>
+
+<p>"To take you about?" asked Andy
+excitedly.</p>
+
+<p>Then Thomas must needs explain that they
+must do their share in looking after the sick
+folk, and that David and Andy were to be
+Doctor Joe's dog drivers when winter came.</p>
+
+<p>"'Twill be fine to manage the dogs for you,
+sir!" exclaimed David, turning to Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p>"Wonderful fine!" echoed Andy.</p>
+
+<p>"And will you be goin' outside the Bay?"
+asked David.</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, outside the Bay and in it, wherever
+there's need to go," said Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47"></a>"'Twill be tryin' and hard work sometimes,"
+suggested Thomas, "travellin' when the
+weather's nasty, but I'm not doubtin' the
+lads'll be able t' manage un."</p>
+
+<p>"We'll manage un!" David declared with
+pride in the confidence placed in him and
+Andy.</p>
+
+<p>To drive dogs on these sub-arctic trails in
+fair weather and foul calls for courage and
+grit, and the lads felt justly proud of the
+responsibility that had been laid upon them.
+There would be many a shift to make on the
+ice, they knew. There would be blinding
+blizzards and withering arctic winds to face,
+and no end of hard work. But these lads of
+The Labrador loved to stand upon their feet
+like men and face and conquer the elements
+like hardy men of courage. This is the way
+of boys the world over&mdash;eager for the time
+when they may assume the responsibility of
+manhood. Such a time comes earlier to the
+lads of The Labrador than with us. In that
+stern land there is no idling and there are no
+holidays, and every one, the lad as well as
+his father, must always do his part, which is
+his best.</p>
+
+<p>Fort Pelican, the nearest port at which the
+<a name="Page_48" id="Page_48"></a>mail boat called, was seventy miles eastward
+from The Jug. With the uncertainty of wind
+and tide the boat journey to Fort Pelican
+usually consumed three days, and with equal
+time required for return, the voyage could
+seldom be accomplished in less than six days.
+Lem Horn and his family lived at Horn's
+Bight, thirty miles from The Jug, and fifteen
+miles beyond, at Caribou Arm, was Jerry
+Snook's cabin. Save an Eskimo settlement
+of half a dozen huts near Fort Pelican and the
+families of Lem Horn and Jerry Snook, the
+country lying between The Jug and Fort
+Pelican was uninhabited. It was unlikely
+that evening would find the travellers in the
+vicinity of either Horn's or Snook's cabins,
+and therefore it was to be a camping trip,
+which was quite to the liking of the boys.</p>
+
+<p>The boys washed the old fishing boat and
+packed the equipment and provisions for the
+voyage. Margaret baked three big loaves of
+white bread, and as a special treat a loaf of
+plum bread. The remaining provisions consisted
+of tea, a bottle of molasses for sweetening,
+flour, baking-powder, fat salt pork, lard,
+margarine, salt and pepper. The equipment
+included a frying-pan, a basin for mixing
+<a name="Page_49" id="Page_49"></a>dough, a tin kettle for tea, a larger kettle to
+be used in cooking, one large cooking spoon,
+four teaspoons and some tin plates. Each of
+the boys as well as Doctor Joe was provided
+with a sheath knife carried on the belt. The
+sheath knife serves the professional hunter as
+a cooking knife, as well as for eating and
+general purposes.</p>
+
+<p>For camping use there was a cotton wedge
+tent, a small sheet-iron tent stove, three camp
+axes, some candles and matches, a file for
+sharpening the axes and a sleeping-bag for
+each. Men in that land do not travel without
+arms, and it was decided that David should
+take a carbine and Andy and Doctor Joe
+each a double-barrel shotgun, for there might
+be an opportunity to shoot a fat goose or
+duck.</p>
+
+<p>Thomas's big boat had two light masts
+rigged with leg-o'-mutton sails. Just forward
+of the foremast David and Andy placed some
+flat stones, and covering them with two or
+three inches of gravel set the tent stove upon
+the gravel. Here they could cook their meals
+at midday, and the gravel would protect the
+bottom of the boat from heat. A sufficient
+quantity of fire-wood was taken aboard, and
+<a name="Page_50" id="Page_50"></a>the provisions and other equipment stowed
+under a short deck forward where the things
+would be protected from storm and all would
+be in readiness for an early start in the
+morning.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III"></a>CHAPTER III</h3>
+
+<h2>"'TIS THE GHOST OF LONG JOHN"</h2>
+
+
+<p>The morning was clear and crisp. Breakfast
+was eaten by candle-light, and before
+sunrise Doctor Joe and the boys, with the
+tide to help them, worked the big boat down
+through The Jug and past the Point into
+Eskimo Bay. In the shelter of The Jug,
+which lay in the lee of the hills, the sails
+flapped idly and it was necessary to bring
+the long oars into service. But beyond the
+sheltered harbour a light north-west breeze
+caught and filled the sails, the oars were
+stowed, the rudder shipped, and with David
+at the tiller Doctor Joe lighted his pipe and
+settled himself for a quiet smoke while Andy
+and Jamie turned their attention to their
+scout handbooks.</p>
+
+<p>It was an inspiring morning. The sky was
+cloudless. The air was charged with scent of
+<a name="Page_52" id="Page_52"></a>spruce and balsam fir, wafted down by the
+breeze from the forest, lying in dark and solemn
+silence and spreading away from the near-by
+shore until it melted into the blue haze of
+rolling hills far to the northward. The huge
+black back of a grampus rose a hundred feet
+from the boat and with a noise like the loud
+exhaust of steam sank again beneath the
+surface of the Bay. Now and again a seal
+raised its head and looked curiously at the
+travellers and then hastily dived. Gulls and
+terns soared and circled overhead, occasionally
+dipping to the water to capture a choice morsel
+of food. A flock of wild geese, honking in
+flight, turned into a bight and alighted where
+a brook coursed down through a marsh to join
+the sea.</p>
+
+<p>"There's some geese," remarked David,
+breaking the silence. "They're comin' up
+south now. We'll have a hunt when we gets
+home. They always feeds in that mesh when
+they're bidin' about the Bay."</p>
+
+<p>Presently Andy exclaimed:</p>
+
+<p>"I can tie un all! I can tie every knot in
+the book!"</p>
+
+<p>"I can tie un too!" said Jamie.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes! Yes! There are the scout tests!"
+<a name="Page_53" id="Page_53"></a>broke in Doctor Joe. "Suppose we all tie
+the knots and pass the tests."</p>
+
+<p>Andy and Jamie tied them easily enough,
+and then Doctor Joe tied them himself to keep
+pace with the boys, and Andy relieved David
+at the tiller that he might try his hand at
+them; David not only tied all the knots
+illustrated in the handbook, but for good
+measure added a bowline on a bight, a double
+carrick bend, a marlin hitch and a halliard hitch.</p>
+
+<p>"That's wonderful easy to do," David
+declared as he laid the rope down. "'Tis
+strange they calls that a test, 'tis so easy done."</p>
+
+<p>"Easy for us," admitted Doctor Joe, "but
+for boys who have never had much to do with
+boats or ropes it's a hard test, and an important
+one. You chaps knew how to tie them, so
+in doing it you haven't learned anything new.
+Let us make up our minds as scouts to learn
+something new every day&mdash;something we never
+knew before, no matter how small or unimportant
+it may seem. Think what a lot we'll
+know next year that we do not know now;
+everything we learn, too, is sure to be of use
+to us sometime in our lives.</p>
+
+<p>"As we go along we'll find there is a great
+deal to learn in this handbook, and all of it is
+<a name="Page_54" id="Page_54"></a>worth knowing. We don't look far ahead.
+Suppose we begin with the scout law. With
+your good memories you'll learn it before we
+go ashore to-night. I want you to learn the
+twelve points of the law in order as they appear
+in the book, so that you can repeat them and
+tell me in your own words what each point
+means."</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe turned to the scout law and
+explained each point in detail. When he told
+them that "A Scout is kind" meant that
+they must not only be kind to people, but
+that they must protect and not kill harmless
+birds and animals, David protested:</p>
+
+<p>"If we promises <i>that</i>, sir, 'twould stop us
+huntin' seals and deer and pa'tridges and
+plenty o' things."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, no!" explained Doctor Joe. "It
+does not mean that. It means that you must
+kill nothing <i>needlessly</i>. Here in Labrador we
+must kill seals and deer and partridges and
+other game for food and for their skins. That
+is the way we make our living. In the same
+way they have to kill cows and sheep and
+goats and pigs for food in the country I came
+from and to get skins for boots and gloves.
+In the same way we are permitted to kill game
+<a name="Page_55" id="Page_55"></a>when necessary. But we're not to kill anything
+that's harmless unless we need it for some
+purpose. The Indians and other people about
+here shoot at loons for sport. I've seen them
+chase the loons in canoes and keep shooting
+at them every time they came up after a dive,
+until the loons were too tired to dive quickly
+enough to get out of the way of the shot,
+and then the poor things were killed. The
+flesh isn't fit to eat and they're always thrown
+away. That is cruel."</p>
+
+<p>"I never thought of un that way. I've
+killed loons too," David confessed, "but I'll
+never shoot at a loon again. 'Tis the same
+with gulls and other things we never uses
+when we kills, and just shoot at for fun."</p>
+
+<p>"That's the idea," said Doctor Joe enthusiastically.
+"Now what do you think about
+killing hen partridges in summer?"</p>
+
+<p>"We can kill pa'tridges, can't we?" asked
+David. "We always eats un, and you said
+we could kill un."</p>
+
+<p>"But we've got to use our heads about it,"
+Doctor Joe explained. "I'm talking now
+about <i>hen</i> partridges in <i>summer</i>. They always
+have broods of little partridges then. If you
+kill the mother all the little ones die, for they're
+<a name="Page_56" id="Page_56"></a>too small to take care of themselves. Do you
+think that's right?"</p>
+
+<p>"I never thought of un before," said David.
+"'Tis wicked to kill un! I'll never kill a hen
+pa'tridge in summer again! Not me!"</p>
+
+<p>"We'll have to be tellin' everybody in the
+Bay about that!" declared Andy. "Nobody
+has ever thought about the poor little uns
+starvin' and dyin'!"</p>
+
+<p>"That'll be doing good scout work," Doctor
+Joe commended. "That's one way you'll be
+useful as scouts here in Labrador. Not only
+will you be showing kindness to the mother
+and little partridges, but if the mother is
+permitted to live and raise her brood, all the
+little birds will be full grown by winter, and
+it will make that many more partridges that
+can be used for food when food is needed."</p>
+
+<p>When presently Jamie announced that it
+was "'most noon" and he was "fair starvin',"
+and the others suddenly discovered that they
+were hungry too, a fire was lighted in the stove
+and a cosy lunch of fried pork and bread, and
+hot tea sweetened with molasses, was eaten
+with an appetite and relish such as only those
+can enjoy who live in the open. Then, with
+growing interest the lads returned to their
+<a name="Page_57" id="Page_57"></a>scout books, and camping time came almost
+before they were aware.</p>
+
+<p>The sun was drooping low in the west when
+David, indicating a low, wooded point, said:</p>
+
+<p>"That's Flat P'int. There's good water
+there and 'tis a fine camping place."</p>
+
+<p>"Then we'll camp there," Doctor Joe agreed.</p>
+
+<p>"Look! Look!" exclaimed Andy, as the
+boat approached the shore. "There's a
+porcupine!"</p>
+
+<p>Following the direction in which Andy
+pointed, a fat porcupine was discovered high
+up in a spruce tree feeding upon the tender
+branches and bark.</p>
+
+<p>"Shall we have un for supper?" Andy
+asked excitedly.</p>
+
+<p>"Aye," said David, "let's have un for
+supper. Fresh meat'll go fine."</p>
+
+<p>A shot from the rifle, when they had landed,
+brought the unfortunate porcupine tumbling
+to the ground, and Andy proceeded at once to
+skin and dress his game for supper.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll be cook and Andy cookee," Doctor
+Joe announced. "We'll get wood for the fire,
+David, and you and Jamie pitch the tent and
+get it ready."</p>
+
+<p>Flat Point was well wooded, and the floor of
+<a name="Page_58" id="Page_58"></a>the forest thickly carpeted with grey caribou
+moss. David selected a level spot between
+two trees on a little rise near the shore. The
+ridge rope was quickly stretched between
+the trees and the tent securely pegged down.
+Then David and Jamie broke a quantity of
+low-hanging spruce boughs, which they snapped
+from the trees with a dexterous upward bend
+of the wrist. When a liberal pile of these had
+been accumulated at the entrance of the tent,
+David proceeded to lay the bed.</p>
+
+<p>The rear of the tent was to be the head.
+Here he laid a row of the boughs, three deep,
+with the convex side uppermost, then he began
+"shingling" the boughs in rows toward the
+foot. This was done by placing the butt end
+of the bough firmly against the ground with
+half the bough, the convex side uppermost,
+overlapping the bough above it, as shingles
+are lapped on a roof. Thus continuing until
+the floor of the tent was covered he had a
+soft, fragrant springy bed, quite as soft and
+comfortable as a mattress, and upon this he
+and Jamie spread the sleeping-bags.</p>
+
+<p>In the meantime Doctor Joe and Andy had
+collected an ample supply of dry wood for the
+evening, and when, presently, David and Jamie
+<a name="Page_59" id="Page_59"></a>joined them, a cheerful fire was blazing and
+already an appetizing odour was rising from
+the stew kettle.</p>
+
+<p>When the stew and some tender dumplings
+were done Doctor Joe lifted the kettle from
+the fire, and while he filled each plate with a
+liberal portion, and Andy poured tea, David
+put fresh wood upon the fire, for the evening
+had grown cold and frosty with the setting
+sun. The blazing fire was cheerful indeed as
+they settled themselves upon the seat of boughs
+and proceeded to enjoy their supper.</p>
+
+<p>"Um-m-m!" exclaimed Andy. "You knows
+how to cook wonderful fine, Doctor!"</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis <i>wonderful</i> fine stew!" seconded David.</p>
+
+<p>"Not half bad," admitted Doctor Joe, "but
+Andy had as much to do with it as I, and
+the porcupine had a good deal to do with it.
+It was young and fat, and it's tender."</p>
+
+<p>There is no pleasanter hour for the camper
+or voyageur than the evening hour by a
+blazing camp fire. There is no sweeter odour
+than that of the damp forest mingled with the
+smell of burning wood. Beyond the narrow
+circle of light a black wall rises, and behind
+the wall lies the wilderness with its unfathomed
+mysteries. Out in the darkness wild creatures
+<a name="Page_60" id="Page_60"></a>move, silent, stealthy and unseen, behind a
+veil that human eyes cannot penetrate. But
+we know they are there going about the strange
+business of their life, and our imagination is
+awakened and our sensibilities quickened.</p>
+
+<p>The camp fire is a shrine of comradeship
+and friendship. Here it was that the primordial
+ancestors of every living man and woman
+and child gathered at night with their families,
+in those far-off dark ages before history was
+written. The fire was their home. Here they
+found rest and comfort and protection from
+the savage wild beasts that roamed the forests.
+It was a place of veneration. The primitive
+instinct, perchance inherited from those far-off
+ancestors of ours, slumbering in our souls,
+is sometimes awakened, and then we are called
+to the woods and the wild places that God
+made beautiful for us, and at night we gather
+around our camp fire as our ancient ancestors
+gathered around theirs, and we love it just as
+they loved it.</p>
+
+<p>And so it was with the little camp fire on
+Flat Point and with Doctor Joe and the boys.
+With darkness the uncanny light of the Aurora
+Borealis flashed up in the north, its long,
+weird fingers of changing colours moving
+<a name="Page_61" id="Page_61"></a>restlessly across the heavens. The forest and
+the wide, dark waters of Eskimo Bay sank
+behind a black wall.</p>
+
+<p>There was absolute silence, save for the
+ripple of waves upon the shore, each busy
+with his own thoughts, until presently Jamie
+asked:</p>
+
+<p>"Did you ever see a ghost, Doctor?"</p>
+
+<p>"A ghost? No, lad, and I fancy no one
+else ever saw one except in imagination.
+What made you think of ghosts?"</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis so&mdash;still&mdash;and dark out there," said
+Jamie, pointing toward the darkness beyond
+the fire-glow. "And&mdash;I were thinkin' I heard
+something."</p>
+
+<p>"But there <i>is</i> ghosts, sir, plenty of un,"
+broke in Andy. "Pop's seen ghosts and so
+has Zeke Hodge and Uncle Billy and plenty of
+folks. They says the ghost of Long John, the
+old Injun that used to be at the Post and was
+drowned, goes paddlin' and paddlin' about in
+a canoe o' nights."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said David, "I'm thinkin' I saw
+Long John's ghost myself one evenin'. I
+weren't certain of un, but it must have been
+he."</p>
+
+<p>"Nonsense!" Doctor Joe had no patience
+<a name="Page_62" id="Page_62"></a>with the belief popular among Labradormen
+that ghosts of men who have been drowned
+or killed return to haunt the scene of their
+death. "There's no such thing as a ghost."</p>
+
+<p>"What's that now?" Jamie held up his
+hand for silence, and spoke in a subdued voice.</p>
+
+<p>Out of the darkness came the rhythmic
+dipping of a paddle. They all heard it now.
+Doctor Joe arose, and closely followed by the
+boys, stepped down beyond the fire glow. In
+dim outline they could see the silhouette of a
+canoe containing the lone figure of a man
+paddling with the short, quick stroke of the
+Indian.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis the ghost of Long John!" breathed
+Jamie. "'Tis sure he!"</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV"></a>CHAPTER IV</h3>
+
+<h2>SHOT FROM BEHIND</h2>
+
+
+<p>The canoe was coming directly toward
+them. In a moment it touched the shore,
+and as its occupant stepped lightly out the
+boys with one accord exclaimed:</p>
+
+<p>"Injun Jake! 'Tis Injun Jake!"</p>
+
+<p>And so it proved. The greeting he received
+was hearty enough to leave no doubt in his
+mind that he was a welcome visitor. Perhaps
+it was the heartier because of the relief the
+boys experienced in the discovery that the
+lone canoeman was not, after all, the wraith of
+Long John, but was their friend Indian Jake
+in flesh and blood.</p>
+
+<p>When his packs had been removed, Indian
+Jake lifted his canoe from the water, turned it
+upon its side and followed the boys to the fire,
+where Doctor Joe awaited him.</p>
+
+<p>"Just in time!" welcomed Doctor Joe, as
+he shook Indian Jake's hand. "We've
+<a name="Page_64" id="Page_64"></a>finished eating, but there's plenty of stew in
+the kettle. Andy, pour Jake some tea."</p>
+
+<p>Indian Jake, grunting his thanks, silently
+picked up David's empty plate and heaped it
+with stew and dumpling from the kettle without
+the ceremony of waiting to be served.</p>
+
+<p>He was a tall, lithe, muscular half-breed,
+with small, restless, hawk-like eyes and a
+beaked nose that was not unlike the beak of
+a hawk. He had the copper-hued skin and
+straight black hair of the Indian, but otherwise
+his features might have been those of a
+white man. Indian Jake had been the trapping
+companion of David and Andy the previous
+winter, and, as previously stated, was this year
+to be Thomas Angus's trapping partner on the
+fur trails.</p>
+
+<p>The boys were vastly fond of Indian Jake,
+and Thomas and Doctor Joe shared their
+confidence, but the Bay folk generally looked
+upon him with distrust and suspicion. Several
+years before, he had come to the Bay a
+penniless stranger. He soon earned the
+reputation of being one of the best trappers in
+the region. Then, suddenly, he disappeared
+owing the Hudson's Bay Company a considerable
+sum for equipment and provisions sold
+<a name="Page_65" id="Page_65"></a>him on credit. It was well known that in the
+winter preceding his disappearance Indian
+Jake had had a most successful hunting season
+and was in possession of ample means to pay
+his debts. His failure to apply his means to
+this purpose was looked upon as highly dishonest&mdash;akin,
+indeed, to theft.</p>
+
+<p>Two years later he reappeared, again
+penniless. The Company refused him further
+credit, and he had no means of purchasing
+the supplies necessary for his support during
+the trapping season in the interior. It was
+at this time that Thomas Angus broke his
+leg, and it became necessary for David and
+Andy to take his place on the trails. They
+were too young to endure the long months of
+isolation without an older and more experienced
+companion. There was none but Indian Jake
+to go with them, and he was engaged to hunt
+on shares a trail adjacent to theirs.</p>
+
+<p>With his share of the furs captured by the
+end of the trapping season, Indian Jake discharged
+his old debt with the Company.
+This was not sufficient, however, to re-establish
+confidence in him. There was a lurking
+suspicion among them, fostered by Uncle Ben
+Rudder of Tuggle Bight, the wiseacre and
+<a name="Page_66" id="Page_66"></a>oracle of the Bay, that Indian Jake's payment
+of the debt was not prompted by honesty but
+by some ulterior motive.</p>
+
+<p>Indian Jake emptied his plate. He refilled
+it with the last of the stew and again emptied
+it, in the interim swallowing several cups of
+hot tea.</p>
+
+<p>"Good stew," he remarked in appreciation
+and praise when his meal was finished. "When
+were you gettin' back?"</p>
+
+<p>"I reached The Jug day before yesterday,"
+said Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p>"Huh!" Indian Jake grunted approval, as
+he puffed industriously at his pipe. "Where
+you goin' now? To see Lem Horn?"</p>
+
+<p>"No," Doctor Joe answered, "we're going
+to Fort Pelican to get some things I brought
+in on the mail boat."</p>
+
+<p>"I been goose huntin'," Indian Jake
+explained. "Not much goose yet. Too early.
+Got four. Goin' to The Jug now to give
+Thomas a hand. Want to start for Seal Lake
+soon. Don't want to be late."</p>
+
+<p>"Pop's thinkin' to start in a fortnight,"
+said David.</p>
+
+<p>"Good!" acknowledged Indian Jake. "Maybe
+we start sooner. Start when we're ready.
+<a name="Page_67" id="Page_67"></a>I want to go quick. Have plenty time get
+there before freeze-up."</p>
+
+<p>Indian Jake had apparently finished talking.
+Doctor Joe and the boys made several attempts
+to continue the conversation, but only receiving
+responsive grunts, turned to a discussion of
+the flag and other scout problems, while Indian
+Jake was absorbed in his own thoughts.
+Presently he rose and proceeded to unroll his
+bed.</p>
+
+<p>"Plenty of room in the tent," Doctor Joe
+invited. "Better come in with us, Jake."</p>
+
+<p>"Goin' early. Sleep here," he declined, as
+he spread a caribou skin upon the ground to
+protect himself from the damp earth. Then
+he produced a Hudson's Bay Company blanket,
+once white but now of uncertain shade, and
+rolling himself in the blanket, with his feet
+toward the fire, was soon snoring peacefully.</p>
+
+<p>"We won't trouble to douse the fire,"
+Doctor Joe suggested presently. "He wants
+to sleep by it, and he'll look after it. Let's
+turn in."</p>
+
+<p>And with the front of the tent open that
+they might enjoy the air and profit by the
+firelight, they were soon snug in their sleeping-bags
+and as sound asleep as Indian Jake.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68"></a>"High-o!"</p>
+
+<p>The three boys sat up. It was broad daylight,
+and Doctor Joe, on his hands and knees,
+was looking out of the tent.</p>
+
+<p>"Our visitor has gone, and there's little
+wonder, for we've been sleeping like bears and
+it's broad daylight. Hurry, lads, or the sun'll
+be well up before we get away."</p>
+
+<p>The boys sprang up and were soon dressed.
+The fire had burned low, indicating that
+Indian Jake had been gone for a considerable
+time. A fat goose was hanging from the limb
+of a tree. Fastened to it was a piece of birch
+bark, and scribbled upon the birch bark with
+a piece of charcoal from the fire, these words:</p>
+
+<p>"cerprize fur the lads bekos they likes Goos."</p>
+
+<p>Another surprise awaited them. When they
+lifted the lid of the large cooking kettle they
+found it nearly full of boiled goose.</p>
+
+<p>"That's the way o' Indian Jake!" Andy
+exclaimed. "He's always plannin' fine surprises
+for folks."</p>
+
+<p>"It's surely a fine surprise," said Doctor
+Joe. "Breakfast all ready but the tea, and
+a goose for to-night."</p>
+
+<p>Every one hurried, but the sun was well
+up when they put out the fire and hoisted
+<a name="Page_69" id="Page_69"></a>sail. There was little wind, however, and the
+light breeze soon dropped to a dead calm.
+Doctor Joe unshipped the rudder and began
+sculling, while the boys laboured at the long
+oars. At length the tide began running in,
+and progress was so slow that it was decided
+to go ashore and await a turn of the tide or
+a breeze.</p>
+
+<p>"Lem Horn lives just back o' that island,"
+said David, indicating a small wooded island.
+"We might stop and bide there till a breeze
+comes, and see un."</p>
+
+<p>In accordance with the suggestion Doctor
+Joe turned the boat inside the island, and
+there, on the mainland in the edge of a little
+clearing and not a hundred yards distant,
+stood Lem Horn's cabin. It was a secluded
+and peculiarly lonely spot, hidden by the
+island from the few boats that plied the Bay.
+Here lived Lem Horn and his wife and two
+sons, Eli, a young man of twenty-one years,
+and Mark, nineteen years of age.</p>
+
+<p>"There's no smoke," observed Jamie.</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe they're all down to Fort Pelican
+getting their winter outfit," suggested David.</p>
+
+<p>"There seems to be no one about but the
+dogs," said Doctor Joe, as he stepped ashore
+<a name="Page_70" id="Page_70"></a>with the painter and made it fast, while Lem's
+big sledge dogs, lolling in the sun, watched
+them curiously.</p>
+
+<p>Visitors do not knock in Labrador. The
+cabins are always open to travellers whether
+or not the host is at home. Andy was in
+advance, and opening the door he stopped on
+the threshold with an exclamation of horror.</p>
+
+<p>Stretched upon the floor lay Lem Horn, his
+face and hair smeared with blood, and on the
+floor near him was a small pool of blood. A
+chair was overturned, and Lem's legs were
+tangled in a fish-net.</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe leaned over the prostrate figure.</p>
+
+<p>"Shot," said he, "and from behind!"</p>
+
+<p>"Does you mean somebody shot he?"
+asked David, quite horrified.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, and it must have happened yesterday,"
+said Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><a name="Page_70a" id="Page_70a"></a></p>
+<p class="figcenter" style="width: 445px;">
+<img src="images/image002.jpg" width="445" height="600" alt="STRETCHED UPON THE FLOOR LAY LEM HORN" title="STRETCHED UPON THE FLOOR LAY LEM HORN" />
+<span class="caption">STRETCHED UPON THE FLOOR LAY LEM HORN</span>
+</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V"></a>CHAPTER V</h3>
+
+<h2>LEM HORN'S SILVER FOX</h2>
+
+
+<p>"He's alive, and this doesn't look like
+a bad wound," said Doctor Joe after a
+brief examination. "David, put a fire in the
+stove and heat some water! Andy, find some
+clean cloths! Jamie, bring up my medicine
+kit from the boat!"</p>
+
+<p>The boys hurried to carry out the directions,
+while Doctor Joe made a more careful examination
+and discovered a second wound in Lem's
+back, just below the right shoulder.</p>
+
+<p>"Both shots from the back," he mused.
+"This wound explains his condition. The one
+in the head only scraped the skull, and couldn't
+have more than stunned him for a short time.
+The other has caused a good deal of bleeding
+and may be serious."</p>
+
+<p>With David's help Doctor Joe carried Lem
+to his bunk and removed his outer clothing.</p>
+
+<p>The water in the kettle on the stove was now
+<a name="Page_72" id="Page_72"></a>warm enough for Doctor Joe's purpose. He
+poured some of it into a dish, and after dissolving
+in it some antiseptic tablets, cleansed
+and temporarily dressed the wounds.</p>
+
+<p>Restoratives were now applied. Lem
+responded promptly. His breathing became
+perceptible, and at length he opened his eyes
+and stared at Doctor Joe. There was no
+recognition in the stare and in a moment the
+eyes closed. Presently they again opened, and
+this time Lem's lips moved.</p>
+
+<p>"Where's Jane?" he asked feebly.</p>
+
+<p>"Your wife seems to be away and the boys,
+too," said Doctor Joe. "We found you
+alone."</p>
+
+<p>"Gone to Fort Pelican," Lem murmured
+after a moment's thought. He stared at
+Doctor Joe for several minutes, now with the
+look of one trying to recall something, and at
+length asked:</p>
+
+<p>"What's&mdash;been&mdash;happenin' to me?"</p>
+
+<p>"You've been shot," said Doctor Joe. "We
+found you on the floor. Some one has shot
+you."</p>
+
+<p>"The silver! The silver fox skin!" Lem
+displayed excitement. "Be it on the table?
+I had un there!"</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73"></a>"There was no fur on the table when we
+came," said Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p>Lem made a feeble attempt to rise, but
+Doctor Joe pressed him gently back upon the
+pillow, saying as he did so:</p>
+
+<p>"You must lie quiet, Lem. Don't try to
+move. You're not strong enough."</p>
+
+<p>Lem, like a weary child, closed his eyes in
+compliance. Several minutes elapsed before he
+opened them again, and then he looked steadfastly
+at Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know who I am?" Doctor Joe
+asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," answered Lem in a feeble voice;
+"you're Doctor Joe. I knows you. I'm&mdash;glad
+you&mdash;came&mdash;Doctor Joe."</p>
+
+<p>"Lem, you've been shot, but we'll pull you
+through. It isn't so bad, but you've lost
+some blood, and that's left you weak for a
+little while. Don't talk now. Rest, and you'll
+soon be on your feet again."</p>
+
+<p>While Lem lay with closed eyes, Doctor Joe
+turned to consideration of the crime. If it
+were true that a silver fox skin had been taken,
+robbery was undoubtedly the motive for the
+shooting. But who could have known of the
+existence of the skin? And who could have
+<a name="Page_74" id="Page_74"></a>come to this out-of-the-way place unobserved
+by the old trapper and shot him without
+warning?</p>
+
+<p>Instinctively Indian Jake rose before his
+eyes. The half-breed's unsavoury reputation
+forced itself forward. And there was the
+circumstance of Indian Jake's visit to Flat
+Point camp the previous evening, his hurried
+departure in the morning, and his evident
+desire to hurry into the interior wilderness
+where he would be swallowed up for several
+months, and from which there would be
+innumerable opportunities to escape. Suddenly
+Doctor Joe was startled by Lem's voice, quite
+strong and natural now:</p>
+
+<p>"I'm thinkin' 'twere that thief Injun Jake
+that shoots me."</p>
+
+<p>"What makes you think so?" asked Doctor
+Joe.</p>
+
+<p>"He were huntin' geese just below here, and
+he comes in and sits for a bit. I had a silver
+fox skin I were holdin' for a better price than
+they offers at Fort Pelican. 'Twere worth five
+hundred dollars whatever, and they only offers
+three hundred. I were busy mendin' my
+fishin' gear before I stows un away when Injun
+Jake comes. We talks about fur and I brings
+<a name="Page_75" id="Page_75"></a>the silver out t' show he. Then I lays un on
+the table and keeps on mendin' the gear after
+he goes, thinkin' to put the fur up after I gets
+through mendin'."</p>
+
+<p>"What time did Indian Jake come?" asked
+Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p>"A bit after noon. Handy to one o'clock
+'twere, for I were just boilin' the kettle. He
+eats a snack with me."</p>
+
+<p>"How long did he stay? What time did
+he go?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'm not knowin' just the time. I were a
+bit late boilin' the kettle. I boiled un around
+one o'clock. We sets down to the table about
+ten after and 'twere handy to half-past when
+we clears the table. Then Injun Jake has a
+smoke, and I shows he the silver, and I'm
+thinkin' 'twere a bit after two when he goes.
+He said he were goin' to stop on Flat P'int
+last night and get to Tom Angus's to-night
+whatever."</p>
+
+<p>"A little after two o'clock when he left?"</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe 'twere half-past. He had a down
+wind to paddle agin', and he were sayin'
+'twould be slow travellin', and 'twould take
+three or four hours whatever to make Flat
+P'int."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76"></a>"And then what happened?"</p>
+
+<p>"I were settin' mendin' the gear thinkin' to
+finish un and stow un away, and I keeps at
+un till just sundown. I were just gettin' up
+to put the kettle on for supper. That's all I
+remembers, exceptin' I wakes up two or three
+times and tries to move, but when I tries
+there's a wonderful hurt in my shoulder, and
+my head feels like she's bustin', and everything
+goes black in front of my eyes. If the fur's
+gone, Injun Jake took un."</p>
+
+<p>"It's strange," said Doctor Joe, "very
+strange. There's a bullet in your shoulder.
+After you rest a while we'll probe for it
+and see if we can get it out. Don't talk
+any more. Just lie quietly and sleep if you
+can."</p>
+
+<p>The boys were out-of-doors. Doctor Joe was
+glad they had not heard Lem's accusation
+against Indian Jake. The half-breed had been
+good to them, and they held vast faith in his
+integrity. There was some hope that Lem's
+suspicions were not well founded; nevertheless
+Doctor Joe was forced to admit to himself that
+circumstances pointed to Indian Jake as the
+culprit. It was highly improbable that any
+one else should have been in the vicinity without<a name="Page_77" id="Page_77"></a>
+Lem's knowledge. It was quite possible
+that Lem's statement of the hour when he
+was shot was incorrect, for his mind could
+hardly yet be clear enough to be certain, without
+doubt, of details.</p>
+
+<p>Lem quickly dropped into a refreshing
+sleep, and Doctor Joe left him for a little
+while to join the boys out-of-doors. He found
+them behind the house picking the goose
+Indian Jake had left in the tree at the Flat
+Point camp.</p>
+
+<p>"How's Lem, sir? Is he hurt bad?"
+David asked as Doctor Joe seated himself
+upon a stump.</p>
+
+<p>"He's sleeping now. After he rests a little
+we'll see how badly he's hurt," said Doctor
+Joe. "I fancy you chaps are thinking about
+dinner. Hungry already, I'll be bound!"</p>
+
+<p>"Aye," grinned David, "wonderful hungry.
+'Tis most noon, sir."</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe consulted his watch.</p>
+
+<p>"I declare it is. It must have been nearly
+eleven o'clock when we reached here. I didn't
+realize it was so late."</p>
+
+<p>"'Twere ten minutes to eleven, sir," said
+Andy. "I were lookin' to see how long it
+takes us to come from Flat P'int."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78"></a>"What time did we leave Flat Point?"
+asked Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p>"'Twere twenty minutes before seven, sir."
+Andy drew his new watch proudly from his
+pocket to refer to it again, as he did upon
+every possible occasion.</p>
+
+<p>"No," corrected David, "'twere only twenty-five
+minutes before eleven when we leaves Flat
+P'int, and fifteen minutes before eleven when
+we gets here. I looks to see."</p>
+
+<p>"Perhaps your watches aren't set alike,"
+suggested Doctor Joe. "Suppose we compare
+them."</p>
+
+<p>The comparison disclosed a difference, as
+Doctor Joe predicted, of five minutes. Then
+each must needs set his watch with Doctor
+Joe's, which was a little slower than Andy's
+and a little faster than David's.</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe made some mental calculations.
+Both David and Andy had observed their
+watches, and there could be no doubt of
+the length of time it had required them to
+come from Flat Point to Lem's cabin. They
+had consumed four hours, but their progress
+had been exceedingly slow. Indian Jake had
+doubtless travelled much faster in his light
+canoe, but, at best, with the wind against
+<a name="Page_79" id="Page_79"></a>him, he could hardly have paddled from Lem's
+cabin to Flat Point in less than two hours.
+He had arrived one hour after sunset. If
+Lem were correct as to the time when the
+shooting took place, Indian Jake could not be
+guilty.</p>
+
+<p>But still there was, with but one hour or
+possibly a little more in excess of the time
+between sunset and Indian Jake's arrival
+at camp, an uncertain alibi for Indian Jake.
+Lem may have been shot much earlier in the
+afternoon than he supposed. When Lem grew
+stronger it would be necessary to question him
+closely that the hour might be fixed with
+certainty. Whoever had shot and robbed Lem
+must have known of the existence of the silver
+fox skin, and been familiar with the surroundings.
+The shots had doubtless been fired
+through a broken pane in a window directly
+behind the chair in which Lem was sitting at
+the time.</p>
+
+<p>"Why not cook dinner out here over an
+open fire?" Doctor Joe presently suggested.
+"You chaps are pretty noisy, and if you come
+into the house to cook it on the stove, I'm
+afraid you'll wake Lem up, and I want him
+to sleep."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80"></a>"We'll cook un out here, sir," David
+agreed.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis more fun to cook here," Jamie
+suggested.</p>
+
+<p>"Very well. When it's ready you may
+bring it in and we'll eat on the table. Lem
+will probably be awake by that time and he'll
+want something too. Stew the goose so that
+there'll be broth, and we'll give some of it to
+Lem to drink. You'll have to go to Fort
+Pelican without me. I'll have to stay here
+and take care of Lem. If the wind comes up,
+and I think it will, you may get a start after
+dinner," and Doctor Joe returned to the cabin
+to watch over his patient.</p>
+
+<p>The goose was plucked. David split a stick
+of wood, and with his jack-knife whittled
+shavings for the fire. The knife had a keen
+edge, for David was a born woodsman and
+every woodsman keeps his tools always in
+good condition, and the shavings he cut were
+long and thin. He did not cut each shaving
+separately, but stopped his knife just short
+of the end of the stick, and when several
+shavings were cut, with a twist of the blade
+he broke them from the main stick in a bunch.
+Thus they were held together by the butt to
+<a name="Page_81" id="Page_81"></a>which they were attached. He whittled four
+or five of these bunches of shavings, and then
+cut some fine splints with his axe.</p>
+
+<p>David was now ready to light his fire. He
+placed two sticks of wood upon the ground,
+end to end, in the form of a right angle, with
+the opening between the sticks in the direction
+from which the wind came. Taking the butt
+of one of the bunches of shavings in his left
+hand, he scratched a match with his right
+hand and lighted the thin end of the shavings.
+When they were blazing freely he carefully
+placed the thick end upon the two sticks where
+they came together, on the inside of the angle,
+with the burning end resting upon the ground.
+Thus the thick end of the shavings was elevated.
+Fire always climbs upward, and in an instant
+the whole bunch of shavings was ablaze. Upon
+this he placed the other shavings, the thin
+ends on the fire, the butts resting upon the
+two sticks at the angle. With the splints
+which he had previously prepared arranged
+upon this they quickly ignited, and upon
+them larger sticks were laid, and in less than
+five minutes an excellent cooking fire was
+ready for the pot.</p>
+
+<p>Before disjointing the goose, David held it
+<a name="Page_82" id="Page_82"></a>over the blaze until it was thoroughly singed
+and the surface of the skin clear. Then he
+proceeded to draw and cut the goose into
+pieces of suitable size for stewing, placed them
+in the kettle, and covered them with water
+from Lem's spring.</p>
+
+<p>In the meantime Andy cut a stiff green pole
+about five feet in length. The thick end he
+sharpened, and near the other end cut a small
+notch. Using the thick, sharpened end like a
+crowbar, he drove it firmly into the ground
+with the small end directly above the fire.
+Placing a stone between the ground and sloping
+pole, that the pole might not sag too low with
+the weight of the kettle, he slipped the handle
+of the kettle into the notch at the small end of
+the pole, where it hung suspended over the blaze.</p>
+
+<p>Preparing a similar pole, and placing it in
+like manner, Andy filled the tea-kettle and put
+it over the fire to heat for tea.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm thinkin'," suggested David as he
+dropped four or five thick slices of pork into
+the kettle of goose, "'twould be fine to have
+hot bread with the goose."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, make un! Make un!" exclaimed Jamie.</p>
+
+<p>"Aye," seconded Andy, "hot bread would
+go fine with the goose."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83"></a>Andy fetched the flour up from the boat
+and David dipped about a quart of it into the
+mixing pan. To this he added four heaping
+teaspoonfuls of baking-powder and two level
+teaspoonfuls of salt. After stirring the baking-powder
+and salt well into the flour, he added
+to it a heaping cooking-spoonful of lard&mdash;a
+quantity equal to two heaping tablespoonfuls.
+This he rubbed into the flour with the back
+of the large cooking spoon until it was thoroughly
+mixed. He now added water while he mixed
+it with the flour, a little at a time, until the
+dough was of the consistency of stiff biscuit
+dough.</p>
+
+<p>The bread was now ready to bake. There
+was no oven, and the frying-pan must needs
+serve instead. The interior of the frying-pan
+he sprinkled liberally with flour that the dough
+might not stick to it. Then cutting a piece
+of dough from the mass he pulled it into a
+cake just large enough to fit into the frying-pan
+and about half an inch in thickness, and
+laid the cake carefully in the pan.</p>
+
+<p>With a stick he raked from the fire some hot
+coals. With the coals directly behind the
+pan, and with the bread in the pan facing the
+fire, and exposed to the direct heat, he placed
+<a name="Page_84" id="Page_84"></a>it at an angle of forty-five degrees, supporting
+it in that position with a sharpened stick,
+one end forced into the earth and the tip of
+the handle resting upon the other end. The
+bread thus derived heat at the bottom from
+the coals and at the top from the main
+fire.</p>
+
+<p>"She's risin' fine!" Jamie presently announced.</p>
+
+<p>"She'll rise fast enough," David declared
+confidently. "There's no fear of that."</p>
+
+<p>There was no fear indeed. In ten minutes
+the loaf had increased to three times its original
+thickness and the side nearer the ground took
+on a delicate brown, for the greater heat of a
+fire is always reflected toward the ground.
+David removed the pan from its support, and
+without lifting the loaf from the pan, moved
+it round until the brown side was opposite
+the handle. Then he returned the pan to its
+former position. Now the browned half was
+on the upper or handle side, while the unbrowned
+half was on the side near the ground, and in
+a few minutes the whole loaf was deliciously
+browned.</p>
+
+<p>While the bread was baking David drove a
+stick into the ground at one side and a little
+<a name="Page_85" id="Page_85"></a>farther from the fire than the pan. When the
+loaf had browned on top to his satisfaction
+he removed it from the pan and leaned it against
+the stick with the bottom exposed to the fire,
+and proceeded to bake a second loaf.</p>
+
+<p>"Let me have the dough that's left," Jamie
+begged.</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, take un if you likes," David consented.
+"There'll be too little for another loaf,
+whatever."</p>
+
+<p>Jamie secured a dry stick three or four feet
+long and about two inches in diameter. This
+he scraped clean of bark, and pulling the dough
+into a rope as thick as his finger wound it in
+a spiral upon the centre of the stick. Then he
+flattened the dough until it was not above a
+quarter of an inch in thickness.</p>
+
+<p>On the opposite side of the fire from David,
+that he might not interfere with David's cooking,
+he arranged two stones near enough together
+for an end of the stick to rest on each. Here he
+placed it with the dough in the centre exposed
+to the heat. As the dough on the side of the
+stick near the fire browned he turned the
+stick a little to expose a new surface, until his
+twist was brown on all sides.</p>
+
+<p>"Have some of un," Jamie invited. "We'll
+<a name="Page_86" id="Page_86"></a>eat un to stave off the hunger before dinner.
+I'm fair starved."</p>
+
+<p>David and Andy were not slow to accept,
+and Jamie's crisp hot twist was quickly
+devoured.</p>
+
+<p>The kettle of stewing goose was sending
+forth a most delicious appetizing odour. David
+lifted the lid to season it, and stir it with the
+cooking spoon. Jamie and Andy sniffed.</p>
+
+<p>"U-m-m!" from Jamie.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, she smells fine!" Andy breathed.</p>
+
+<p>"Seems like I can't wait for un!" Jamie
+declared.</p>
+
+<p>"She's done!" David at length announced.</p>
+
+<p>"Make the tea, Andy."</p>
+
+<p>Using a stick as a lifter David removed the
+kettle of goose from the fire, while Andy put
+tea in the other kettle, which was boiling,
+removing it also from the fire.</p>
+
+<p>"You bring the bread along, Jamie, and you
+the tea, Andy," David directed, turning into
+the cabin with the kettle of goose.</p>
+
+<p>Lem had just awakened from a most refreshing
+sleep, and when he smelled the goose
+he declared:</p>
+
+<p>"I'm hungrier'n a whale."</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe laid claim also to no small
+<a name="Page_87" id="Page_87"></a>appetite, an appetite, indeed, quite superior
+to that described by Lem.</p>
+
+<p>"A whale!" he sniffed. "Why, I'm as
+hungry as seven whales! Seven, now! Big
+whales, too! No small whales about <i>my</i>
+appetite!"</p>
+
+<p>The three boys laughed heartily, and David
+warned:</p>
+
+<p>"We'll all have to be lookin' out or there
+won't be a bite o' goose left for anybody if
+Doctor Joe gets at un first!"</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe arranged a plate for Lem, upon
+which he placed a choice piece of breast and
+a section of one of David's loaves, which proved,
+when broken, to be light and short and delicious.
+Then he poured Lem a cup of rich broth from
+the kettle, and while Lem ate waited upon
+him before himself joining the boys at the
+table.</p>
+
+<p>"How are you feeling, Lem?" asked Doctor
+Joe when everyone had finished and the boys
+were washing dishes.</p>
+
+<p>"My head's a bit soggy and I'm a bit weak,
+and there's a wonderful pain in my right
+shoulder when I moves un," said Lem. "If
+'tweren't for my head and the weakness and
+the pain I'd feel as well as ever I did, and I'd
+<a name="Page_88" id="Page_88"></a>be achin' to get after that thief Indian
+Jake. As 'tis I'll bide my time till I feels
+nimbler."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think you could let me fuss around
+that shoulder a little while?" Doctor Joe
+asked. "Does it hurt too badly for you to
+bear it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, I can stand un," said Lem. "Fuss
+around un all you wants to, Doctor Joe. You
+knows how to mend un and patch un up, and
+I wants un mended."</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe called Andy to his assistance with
+another basin of warm water, in which, as
+previously, he dissolved antiseptic tablets, explaining
+to the boys the reason, and adding:</p>
+
+<p>"If a wound is kept clean Nature will heal
+it. Nothing you can apply to a wound will
+assist in the healing. All that is necessary
+is to keep it clean and keep it properly bandaged
+to protect it from infection."</p>
+
+<p>"Wouldn't a bit of wet t'baccer draw the
+soreness out?" Lem suggested.</p>
+
+<p>"No! No! No!" protested Doctor Joe,
+properly horrified. "Never put tobacco or
+anything else on a wound. If you do you will
+run the risk of infection which might result
+in blood poisoning, which might kill you."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89"></a>"I puts t'baccer on cuts sometimes and she
+always helps un," insisted Lem.</p>
+
+<p>"It's simply through the mercy of God,
+then, and your good clean blood, that it hasn't
+killed you," declared Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p>From his kit Doctor Joe brought forth bandages
+and gauze and some strange-looking
+instruments, and turned his attention to the
+shoulder. Lem gritted his teeth and, though
+Doctor Joe knew he was suffering, never uttered
+a whimper or complaint.</p>
+
+<p>An examination disclosed the fact that the
+bullet had coursed to the right, and Doctor
+Joe located it just under the skin directly
+forward of the arm pit. Though it was
+necessarily a painful wound, he was relieved to
+find that no vital organ had been injured,
+and he was able to assure Lem that he would
+soon be around again and be as well as
+ever.</p>
+
+<p>When the bullet was extracted Doctor Joe
+examined it critically, washed it and placed
+it carefully in his pocket. It proved to be a
+thirty-eight calibre, black powder rifle bullet.
+Doctor Joe had no doubt of that. He had
+made a study of firearms and had the eye of
+an expert.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90"></a>"It's half-past two, boys. A westerly breeze
+is springing up, and I think you'd better go
+on to Fort Pelican," Doctor Joe suggested.
+"I'll give you a note to the factor instructing
+him to deliver all the things to you. You'll
+be able to make a good run before camping
+time. Stop in here on your way back."</p>
+
+<p>The boys made ready and said good-bye,
+spread the sails, and were soon running before
+a good breeze. Doctor Joe watched them
+disappear round the island, and returning to
+Lem's bedside asked:</p>
+
+<p>"Lem, do you know what kind of a rifle
+Indian Jake carried?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'm not knowin' rightly," said Lem.
+"'Twere either a forty-four or a thirty-eight.
+'Twere he did the shootin'. Nobody else has
+been comin' about here the whole summer.
+I'm not doubtin' he's got my silver fox, and
+I'm goin' to get un back <i>whatever</i>. He'd never
+stop at shootin' to rob, but he'll have to be
+quicker'n I be at shootin', to keep the fur!"</p>
+
+<p>"When are you expecting Mrs. Horn and
+the boys back?" asked Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p>"This evenin' or to-morrow whatever," said
+Lem. "They've been away these five days
+gettin' the winter outfit at Fort Pelican."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91"></a>If Indian Jake were guilty, it was highly
+probable that he would take prompt steps to
+flee the country. He could not dispose of the
+silver fox skin in the Bay, for all the local
+traders had already seen and appraised it,
+and they would undoubtedly recognize it if
+it were offered them. Indian Jake would
+probably plunge into the interior, spend the
+winter hunting, and in the spring make his way
+to the St. Lawrence, where he would be safe
+from detection.</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe made these calculations while
+he sat by the bedside, and his patient dozed.
+He was sorry now that he had not sent the
+boys back to The Jug with a letter to Thomas
+explaining what had occurred. All the evidence
+pointed to Indian Jake's guilt, and there could
+be little doubt of it if it should prove that the
+half-breed carried a thirty-eight fifty-five rifle.
+Thomas would know, and he would take prompt
+action to prevent Indian Jake's escape with
+the silver fox skin. Should it prove, however,
+that Indian Jake's rifle was of different calibre,
+he should be freed from suspicion.</p>
+
+<p>It was dusk that evening when the boat
+bearing Eli and Mark and Mrs. Horn rounded
+the island. Doctor Joe met them. They had
+<a name="Page_92" id="Page_92"></a>seen the boys and had received from them
+a detailed account of what had happened, and
+Mrs. Horn was greatly excited. Her first
+thought was for Lem, and she was vastly
+relieved when she saw him, as he declared he
+did not feel "so bad," and Doctor Joe assured
+her he would soon be around again and as
+well as ever.</p>
+
+<p>Then there fell upon the family a full realization
+of their loss. The silver fox skin that
+had been stolen was their whole fortune. The
+proceeds of its sale was to have been their
+bulwark against need. It was to have given
+them a degree of independence, and above
+all else the little hoard that its sale would
+have brought them was to have lightened
+Lem's burden of labour during his declining
+years.</p>
+
+<p>Eli Horn was a big, broad-shouldered, swarthy
+young man of few words. For an hour after
+he heard his father's detailed story of Indian
+Jake's visit to the cabin, he sat in sullen silence
+by the stove. Suddenly he arose, lifted his
+rifle from the pegs upon which it rested against
+the wall, dropped some ammunition into his
+cartridge bag, and swinging it over his shoulder
+strode toward the door.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93"></a>"Where you goin', Eli?" asked Lem from
+his bunk.</p>
+
+<p>"To hunt Indian Jake," said Eli as he closed
+the door behind him and passed out into the
+night.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI"></a>CHAPTER VI</h3>
+
+<h2>THE TRACKS IN THE SAND</h2>
+
+
+<p>A smart south-west breeze had sprung up.
+White caps were dotting the Bay, and
+with all sails set the boat bowled along at a
+good speed.</p>
+
+<p>David held the tiller, while Andy and Jamie
+busied themselves with their handbooks. They
+were an hour out of Horn's Bight when David
+sighted the Horn boat beating up against the
+wind. Drawing within hailing distance he told
+them of the accident.</p>
+
+<p>Mrs. Horn, greatly excited, asked many
+questions. David assured her that her
+husband's injuries were not serious, nevertheless
+she was quite certain Lem lay at death's
+door.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis the first time I leaves home in most
+a year," she lamented. "I were feelin' inside
+me 'twere wrong to go and leave Lem alone.
+<a name="Page_95" id="Page_95"></a>And now he's gone and been shot and liker'n
+not most killed."</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis too bad to make Mrs. Horn worry so.
+I'm wonderfully sorry," David sympathized,
+as the boats passed beyond speaking distance.
+"She'll worry now till they gets home, and
+the way Lem ate goose I'm thinkin' he ain't
+hurt bad enough to worry much about he."</p>
+
+<p>"They'll get there to-night whatever," said
+Andy. "'Tis the way of Mrs. Horn to worry,
+even when we tells she Lem's doin' fine."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm wonderin' and wonderin' who 'twere
+shot Lem," said David. "Whoever 'twere
+had un in his heart to do murder."</p>
+
+<p>"Whoever 'twere looked in through the
+window and saw Lem with the fine silver fox
+on the table and sets out to get the fox,"
+reasoned Andy. "The shootin' were done
+through the window where there's a pane of
+glass broke out."</p>
+
+<p>"I sees where there's a pane of glass out,"
+said David. "'Twas not fresh broke though."</p>
+
+<p>"No, 'twere an old break," Andy agreed.
+"I goes to look at un, and I sees fresh tracks
+under the window where the man stands
+when he shoots."</p>
+
+<p>"Tracks!" exclaimed David. "I never
+<a name="Page_96" id="Page_96"></a>thought to look for tracks now! I weren't
+thinkin' of that! You thinks of more things
+than I ever does, Andy."</p>
+
+<p>"I weren't thinkin' of tracks either," said
+Andy, disclaiming credit for their discovery.
+"Whilst you bakes the bread I just goes to
+look where the window is broke, and when
+I'm there I sees the strange-lookin' tracks."</p>
+
+<p>"Strange, now! How was they strange?"
+asked Jamie excitedly, scenting a deepening
+mystery.</p>
+
+<p>"They was made with boots with <i>nails</i> in the
+bottom of un," explained Andy. "They was
+nails all over the bottom of them boots, and
+they was big boots, them was. They made
+big tracks&mdash;wonderful big tracks."</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis strange, now! Did you trace un,
+Andy? Did you see what way the tracks
+goes?" asked David.</p>
+
+<p>"'Twere only under the window where the
+ground were soft and bare of moss that the
+tracks showed the nails. I tracks un down
+though to where they comes in a boat and the
+boat goes again," Andy explained. "The tracks
+were a day old, and down by the water the
+tide's been in and washed un away. Whoever
+'twere makes un were beyond findin' whatever.
+<a name="Page_97" id="Page_97"></a>They were goin' away, I'm thinkin', right after
+they shoots Lem and takes his silver."</p>
+
+<p>"Did you tell Doctor Joe about the tracks?"
+asked David.</p>
+
+<p>"No, I weren't thinkin' to tell he when we
+goes in to eat, and he weren't wantin' us in
+before that fearin' we'd wake Lem. The tracks
+weren't of much account whatever. The folk
+that shot Lem were leavin' in a boat and we
+couldn't track the boat to find out who 'twere."</p>
+
+<p>A drizzling rain began to fall before they
+made camp that night. It was too wet and
+dreary under the dripping trees for an open
+camp fire. The stove was therefore brought
+into service and set up in the tent, and there
+they cooked and ate their supper by candle-light.</p>
+
+<p>On a cold and stormy night there is no article
+in the camp equipment more useful than a
+little sheet-iron stove. With its magic touch
+it transforms a wet and dismal tent into the
+snuggest and cosiest and most comfortable
+retreat in the whole world. Outside the wind
+was now dashing the rain in angry gusts against
+the canvas, and moaning drearily through
+the tree tops. Within the fire crackled cheerily.
+The tent was dry and snug and warm. The
+<a name="Page_98" id="Page_98"></a>bed of fragrant balsam and spruce boughs,
+the smell of the fire and the soft candle-light
+combined to give it an indescribable atmosphere
+of luxury.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning the weather had not improved.
+The wind had risen during the night, and was
+driving the rain in sheets over the Bay. David
+went outside to make a survey, and when he
+returned he reported:</p>
+
+<p>"'Twill be a nasty day abroad."</p>
+
+<p>"Let's bide here till the rain stops," suggested
+Jamie.</p>
+
+<p>"The wind's fair, and if she keeps up and
+don't turn too strong we'll make Fort Pelican
+by evenin' whatever, if we goes," David
+objected.</p>
+
+<p>"'Twon't be so bad, once we're out and gets
+used to un," said Andy.</p>
+
+<p>"No, 'twon't be so bad," urged David. "The
+wind may shift and fall calm, when the rain's
+over, and if we bides here we'll lose time in
+gettin' to Fort Pelican. I'm for goin' and
+makin' the best of un."</p>
+
+<p>"I won't mind un," agreed Jamie, stoutly.</p>
+
+<p>"I got grit to travel in the rain, and we wants
+to make a fast cruise of un."</p>
+
+<p>It was "nasty" indeed when after breakfast
+<a name="Page_99" id="Page_99"></a>they broke camp and set sail. In a little while
+they were wet to the skin, and it was miserably
+cold; but they were used enough to the beat
+of wind and rain in their faces, and all declared
+that it was not "so bad" after all. To these
+hardy lads of The Labrador rain and cold was
+no great hardship. It was all in a day's work,
+and scudding along before a good breeze,
+and looking forward to a good dinner in the
+kitchen at Fort Pelican, and to a snug bed
+at night, they quite forgot the cold and rain.</p>
+
+<p>During the morning the wind shifted to the
+westward, and before noon it drew around
+to the north-west. With the shift of wind the
+rain ceased, and the clouds broke. Then Andy
+lighted a fire in the stove, boiled the kettle
+and fried a pan of salt pork. Hot tea, with
+bread dipped in the warm pork grease, warmed
+them and put them in high spirits.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis fine we didn't bide in camp," remarked
+David as he swallowed a third cup of tea.
+"With this fine breeze we'll make Fort Pelican
+to-night, whatever."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm fine and warm now," declared Jamie,
+"but 'twas a bit hard to face the rain when
+we starts this marnin'."</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis always the thinkin' about un that
+<a name="Page_100" id="Page_100"></a>makes things hard to do," observed David.</p>
+
+<p>"Things we has to do seems wonderful hard
+before we gets at un, but mostly they're easy
+enough after we tackles un. The thinkin'
+beforehand's the hardest part of any hard
+job."</p>
+
+<p>The sun broke out between black clouds
+scudding across the sky. The wind was
+gradually increasing in force. By mid-afternoon
+half a gale was blowing, a heavy sea;
+was running, and the old boat, heeling to the
+gale, was in a smother of white water.</p>
+
+<p>"We're makin' fine time!" shouted David,
+shaking the spray from his hair.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll sure make Fort Pelican this evenin'
+early," Andy shouted back.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll not make un!" Jamie protested.
+"The wind's gettin' too strong! We'll have
+to go ashore and make camp!"</p>
+
+<p>"The boat'll stand un," laughed David.
+"She's a sturdy craft in a breeze."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm afeared," said Jamie.</p>
+
+<p>"'A scout is brave,'" quoted Andy.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tisn't meant for a scout to be foolish,"
+Jamie insisted. "I'm afeared of bein' foolish."</p>
+
+<p>"You was braggin' of havin' grit," Andy
+taunted.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101"></a>"I has grit and a stout heart," Jamie proudly
+asserted, "but there's no such need of haste
+as to tempt a gale. 'Tis time to lie to and
+camp."</p>
+
+<p>David's answer was lost in the smother of
+a great roller that chased them, and breaking
+astern nearly swept him from the tiller. When
+the lads caught their breath there was a foot
+of sea in the bottom of the boat.</p>
+
+<p>"Bail her out!" bellowed David, shaking
+the water from his eyes.</p>
+
+<p>"Jamie's right! 'Tis blowin' too high for
+comfort!" shouted Andy, as he and Jamie,
+each with a kettle, bailed. "We'd better not
+risk goin' on! Find a lee to make a landin',
+Davy."</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis against reason not to take shelter!"
+piped Jamie.</p>
+
+<p>"Fort Pelican's only ten miles away!"
+David shouted back in protest. "We'll soon
+make un in this fine breeze!"</p>
+
+<p>The boat was riding on her beam ends.
+White horses breaking over her bow sent
+showers of foam her whole length. A sudden
+squall that nearly capsized her roused David
+suddenly to their danger.</p>
+
+<p>"Reef the mains'l!" he shouted.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102"></a>"Make for the lee of Comfort Island!"
+sputtered Andy through the spray, as he and
+Jamie sprang for the mainsail to reef it.</p>
+
+<p>"Make for un!" echoed Jamie. "'Tis
+against reason to keep goin'."</p>
+
+<p>The wind shrieked through the rigging. Another
+great roller all but swamped them.
+The sudden fury of the wind, the ever higher-piling
+seas, and the rollers that had so nearly
+overwhelmed the boat brought to David a
+full sense of their peril. He had been foolhardy
+and headstrong in his determination to continue
+to Fort Pelican. He realized this now even
+more fully than Andy and Jamie.</p>
+
+<p>David was a good seaman and fearless, with
+a full measure of faith in his skill. Now that
+his eyes were open to the peril in which he had
+placed them, he knew that all the skill he
+possessed and perhaps more would be required
+to take them safely into shelter.</p>
+
+<p>Comfort Island with its offer of snug harbour
+lay a half mile to leeward. David brought
+the boat before the wind, and headed directly
+for the island.</p>
+
+<p>Great breakers, pounding the high, rockbound
+shores of Comfort Island, and booming
+like cannon, threw their spray a hundred feet
+<a name="Page_103" id="Page_103"></a>in the air, enveloping the island in a cloud of
+mist.</p>
+
+<p>Stretching away from the island for a mile
+to the westward was a rocky shoal known as
+the Devil's Arm. At high tide, in calm
+weather, it might be crossed, but now it was
+a great white barrier of roaring breakers rising
+in mighty geysers above the sea.</p>
+
+<p>To the eastward of the island was a mass of
+black reefs known as the Devil's Tea Kettle.
+The Devil's Tea Kettle was always an evil
+place. Now it was a great boiling cauldron
+whose waters rose and fell in a seething white
+mass.</p>
+
+<p>It was quite out of the question to round the
+Devil's Arm and beat back against the wind
+to the lee of the island. There was a narrow
+passage between the Devil's Tea Kettle and
+the island. If they could make this passage it
+would be a simple matter to fall in behind
+the island to shelter and safety.</p>
+
+<p>All of these things David saw at a glance.
+It was a desperate undertaking, but it was
+the only chance, and he held straight for the
+passage. If he could keep the boat to her
+course, he would make it. If a sudden squall
+of wind overtook them the leeway would
+<a name="Page_104" id="Page_104"></a>throw them upon the island breakers and
+they would be swallowed up in an instant
+and pounded to pieces upon the rocks.</p>
+
+<p>Over and over again David breathed the
+prayer: "Lord, take us through safe! Lord,
+take us through safe!" His face was set,
+but his nerves were iron. Andy and Jamie,
+tense with the peril and excitement of the
+adventure, crouched in the bottom of the boat.
+As they drew near the island, Jamie shouted
+encouragingly:</p>
+
+<p>"Keep your grit, and a stout heart like a
+man, Davy!" but the roar of breakers drowned
+his voice, and David did not hear.</p>
+
+<p>"Is you afraid, Jamie?" Andy yelled in
+Jamie's ear.</p>
+
+<p>"Aye," answered Jamie, "but I has plenty
+of grit."</p>
+
+<p>He who knows danger and meets it manfully
+though he fears it, is brave, and Jamie and all
+of them were brave.</p>
+
+<p>The boat was in the passage at last. David,
+every nerve tense, held her down to it. On the
+right seethed the Devil's Tea Kettle, sending
+forth a continuous deafening roar. On the
+left was Comfort Island with a boom! boom!
+of thundering breakers smashing against its
+high, sullen bulwarks of black rocks. The
+boat was so near that spray from the breakers
+fell over it in a shower.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><a name="Page_104a" id="Page_104a"></a></p>
+<p class="figcenter" style="width: 726px;">
+<img src="images/image003.jpg" width="726" height="500" alt="ON THE RIGHT SEETHED THE DEVIL&#39;S TEA KETTLE" title="ON THE RIGHT SEETHED THE DEVIL&#39;S TEA KETTLE" />
+<span class="caption">ON THE RIGHT SEETHED THE DEVIL&#39;S TEA KETTLE</span>
+</p>
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105"></a>It was over in a moment. The Devil's
+Tea Kettle, with all its loud threats, was
+behind them. The boat shot down along
+the shore, David swung to port, and they
+were safe in the quiet waters to the lee of
+the island.</p>
+
+<p>"Thank the Lord!" said David reverently,
+as he brought the little craft to and the sail
+flapped idly.</p>
+
+<p>"'Twere a close shave," breathed Jamie.</p>
+
+<p>"A wonderful close shave," echoed Andy.</p>
+
+<p>"You had grit," said Jamie. "You has
+plenty o' grit, Davy&mdash;and a stout heart, like
+a man. 'Twere wonderful how you cracked
+her through! There's nary a man on the
+coast could have done better'n that!"</p>
+
+<p>"'Twere easy enough," David boasted with
+a laugh as he wiped the spray from his face,
+and unshipping the rudder proceeded to scull
+the boat into a natural berth between the
+rocks.</p>
+
+<p>Hardly a breath of the gale raging outside
+reached them in their snug little harbour.
+The boat was made fast with the painter to
+<a name="Page_106" id="Page_106"></a>a ledge, and the boys climed to the high rocky
+shore.</p>
+
+<p>An excellent camping place was discovered
+a hundred yards back in a grove of stunted
+spruce trees that had rooted themselves in
+the scant soil that covered the rocks, and held
+fast, despite the Arctic blasts that swept
+across the Bay to rake the island during the
+long winters. Here the tent was pitched, and
+everything carried up from the boat and stowed
+within to dry. Fifteen minutes later the
+tent stove was crackling cheerily and sending
+forth comfort to the drenched young mariners.
+"There'll be no hurry in the marnin',"
+said David when they had eaten supper and
+lighted a candle. "We'll stay up to-night
+till we gets the outfit all dried, and if we're
+late about un we'll sleep a bit later in the
+marnin', to make up. We'll make Fort Pelican
+in an hour, or two hours <i>what</i>ever, if we has a
+civil breeze in the marnin'."</p>
+
+<p>"We'll not be gettin' away from Fort
+Pelican to-morrow, will we?" asked Andy.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll take the day for visitin' the folk
+and hearin' the news, and start back the
+marnin' after," suggested David.</p>
+
+<p>It was near midnight when they crawled
+<a name="Page_107" id="Page_107"></a>into their beds to drop into a ten-knot sleep,
+and they slept so soundly than none of them
+awoke until they were aroused by the sun
+shining upon the tent the next morning.</p>
+
+<p>Breakfast was prepared and eaten leisurely.
+There was no hurry. The wind had fallen
+to a moderate stiff breeze, and Fort Pelican,
+through the narrows connecting Eskimo Bay
+with the sea outside, was almost in sight.</p>
+
+<p>When the dishes were washed Andy and
+Jamie took down the tent, while David
+shouldered a pack and preceded them to the
+place where they had moored the boat the
+previous evening. A few minutes later he came
+running back, and in breathless excitement
+startled them with the announcement:</p>
+
+<p>"The boat's gone!"</p>
+
+<p>"Gone where?" asked Andy incredulously.</p>
+
+<p>"Gone! I'm not knowin' <i>where</i>!" exclaimed
+David.</p>
+
+<p>"Has she been took?" asked Jamie, excitedly.</p>
+
+<p>"Took!" said David. "The painter were
+untied and she were took! There's tracks about
+of big boots with nails in un!"</p>
+
+<p>Andy and Jamie ran down with David.
+No trace of the boat was to be found.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108"></a>In the earth above the shore were plainly
+to be seen the tracks of two men wearing hobnailed
+boots.</p>
+
+<p>"They's fresh tracks," declared David.</p>
+
+<p>"Made this marnin'," Andy agreed. "They's
+the same kind of tracks as the ones I see
+under Lem's window. Whoever 'twere made
+these tracks shot Lem and took his silver."</p>
+
+<p>"And now we're left here on the island with
+no way of gettin' off," said David.</p>
+
+<p>"What'll we be doin'? How'll we ever
+get away?" asked Jamie in consternation.</p>
+
+<p>But that was a question none of them could
+answer.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII"></a>CHAPTER VII</h3>
+
+<h2>THE MYSTERY OF THE BOAT</h2>
+
+
+<p>The boys looked at each other in consternation.
+They were marooned on a
+desolate, rocky, sparsely wooded island.
+Boats passed only at rare intervals, and a fortnight,
+or even a month, might elapse before
+an opportunity for rescue offered. Their provisions
+would scarcely last a week, and the
+island was destitute of game.</p>
+
+<p>"Whoever 'twere took the boat," Andy
+suggested presently, "were on the island when
+we comes."</p>
+
+<p>"Aye," David agreed, "and makin' for
+Fort Pelican. They been up as far as Lem's
+and they's gettin' away with Lem's silver
+to sell un."</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis strange boots they wears," said Jamie.
+"Strange boots them is with nails in un."</p>
+
+<p>"'Twere no man of The Labrador made them
+tracks," David declared.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110"></a>"I never sees boots with nails in un," said
+Andy, "except the boots the lumber folks
+wears over at the new camp at Grampus
+River."</p>
+
+<p>"Aye," agreed David, "they wears un.
+When we goes over with Pop last month when
+the big steamer comes I sees un. Plenty of
+un wears boots with nails in."</p>
+
+<p>"That's who 'twere took our boat!" said
+Andy. "'Twere men from the Grampus River
+lumber camp."</p>
+
+<p>"Let's track un and see where they were
+camped," suggested David.</p>
+
+<p>The trail was easily followed. Here and
+there a footprint appeared where soil had
+drifted in among the rocks above the shore.
+The trail led them three hundred yards to
+the eastward, and then down into a sheltered
+hollow just above the water's edge, where a
+small boat was drawn up upon the shore.</p>
+
+<p>"Here's a boat!" exclaimed Jamie, who had
+run ahead.</p>
+
+<p>"A boat!" shouted David. "They left
+un and took our boat."</p>
+
+<p>"And good reason!" said Jamie, who had
+reached the skiff. "The bottom's half knocked
+out of un."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111"></a>It was evident that the boat had been driven
+upon the rocks in making a landing, and a
+jagged hole a foot square appeared in the
+bottom, rendering it in that condition quite
+useless. Near by a tent had been pitched,
+and there was no doubt that the men who had
+abandoned the boat had been in camp for a
+day at least in the sheltered hollow.</p>
+
+<p>The boys turned the boat over and examined
+the break.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis a bad place to mend," observed David.</p>
+
+<p>"But we can mend un," declared Andy.
+"We can mend un by noon whatever, and get
+to Fort Pelican this evenin'."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm doubtin'," David shook his head.
+"'Twill take a day to mend un whatever, and
+she'll be none too safe. 'Twill be hard to make
+un water-tight."</p>
+
+<p>"We can mend un," Andy insisted.</p>
+
+<p>A close examination of the tracks disclosed
+the fact that there had undoubtedly been two
+men in the party. They had reached the
+island before the rain of two days before.
+This was disclosed by the fact that some of
+the tracks were partly washed away by the
+rain, and the earth was caked where the wind
+and sun had dried it afterwards.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112"></a>Natives of the coast, as was the case with
+David and Jamie and Andy, wore home-made
+sealskin boots in summer and buckskin
+moccasins in winter. The sealskin boots had
+moccasin feet with one thickness of skin, and
+were soft and pliable. None of them ever
+wore soled boots that would admit of hobnails.
+It was plain to the boys, therefore, that the
+men who made the tracks were not natives
+of the country.</p>
+
+<p>Early in the summer a lumber company
+had begun the erection of a camp at Grampus
+River, which lay twenty miles to the southward
+from The Jug, and on the opposite side
+of Eskimo Bay. A steamship had brought in
+men and supplies, and all summer men had
+been building camps and preparing for lumbering
+operations during the coming winter.</p>
+
+<p>It was the first steamer to enter the Bay,
+and its advent had been an occasion of much
+curiosity on the part of the people. Many
+of them made excursions to Grampus River
+to see the strangers at work. Thomas had
+made such an excursion with David and Andy.
+Strange, rough, blasphemous men they seemed
+to the God-fearing folk of the country. These
+were the men wearing hobnailed boots of which
+<a name="Page_113" id="Page_113"></a>David spoke, and there was small doubt in
+the mind of the boys that the men who had
+camped on the island and had stolen the
+boat were from the Grampus River lumber
+camp.</p>
+
+<p>It proved a tedious undertaking to repair
+and make seaworthy the damaged boat. The
+trees on the island were, for the most part,
+small gnarled spruce, twisted and stunted by
+the northern blasts which swept the Bay.
+After some search, however, they discovered
+a white spruce tree suitable for their purpose,
+with a trunk ten inches in diameter. David
+felled it and cut from its butt a two-foot length.
+This he proceeded to split into as thin slabs
+as possible. Then with their jack-knives the
+boys began the tedious task of whittling the
+surfaces of the slabs into smooth boards, first
+trimming them down to an inch and a half
+in thickness with the axes.</p>
+
+<p>"How'll we make un fast when we gets un
+done?" asked Jamie. "We has no nails."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm thinkin' of that," said David. "I'm
+not knowin' yet, but we'll find some way."</p>
+
+<p>"I've got a way," Andy announced. "I
+been thinkin' and thinkin' and I found a way
+to make un fast."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114"></a>"How'll you make un fast now without
+nails?" David asked expectantly.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll tie un with spruce roots, like the
+Injuns puts their canoes together," explained
+Andy. "We'll cut holes in each end of un
+in the right place to tie un fast to the braces
+of the boat. We'll have to make holes in the
+bottom of the boat each side of the braces
+for the roots to come through so we can make
+un fast. That'll hold un. Then when we've
+made un fast we'll caulk un up with spruce
+gum."</p>
+
+<p>"Why can't we cut strips of sealskin off
+our sleepin' bags for strings to tie un with?"
+suggested David. "'Twould be easier than
+makin' spruce root strings, and quicker too,
+and the sealskin would be strong and hold
+un tight."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, and soon's the sealskin gets wet
+she'll stretch," Andy objected. "Then the
+boards would loosen up and let the water in."</p>
+
+<p>"I never thought of the sealskin stretchin', but
+she sure would. You're fine at thinkin' things
+out, Andy!" said David admiringly. "The
+spruce roots won't stretch though. 'Tis a
+fine way to fix un now, and she'll work. There's
+no doubtin' she'll work."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115"></a>"'Twill take all day," Andy calculated,
+adding with pride, "but once we gets un on
+they'll hold. I'll get the roots now and put un
+to soak."</p>
+
+<p>Andy dug around the white spruce tree and
+in a little while gathered a sufficient quantity
+of long string-like roots. He scraped them
+and then split them carefully with his knife.
+When they were split he filled the big kettle
+with water from a spring, placed the roots
+in it and put them over the fire to boil.</p>
+
+<p>They all worked as hard as they could on
+the boards, and when dinner time came David
+announced that the boards were smooth enough
+for their purpose.</p>
+
+<p>"Now all we'll have to do," said he as he
+sliced pork for dinner, "is to make the holes
+in un and fasten un on."</p>
+
+<p>"What were that now?" Jamie interrupted
+as a hoarse blast broke upon the air.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis the steamer whistle!" David dropped
+the knife with which he was slicing pork, and
+with Jamie and Andy at his heels ran to the
+top of the highest rock on the island, where
+a wide view of the Bay lay before them.</p>
+
+<p>A mile away the lumber company's big
+steamer was feeling its way cautiously toward
+<a name="Page_116" id="Page_116"></a>the west, bound inward to the Grampus River
+camps. The boys waved their caps and shouted
+at the top of their lungs, but no one on the
+steamer appeared to see them. It was not
+until the great strange vessel had become a
+mere speck in the distance that they turned
+back to the preparation of dinner.</p>
+
+<p>"They didn't see us," said David in disappointment.</p>
+
+<p>"We're not wantin' to go to Grampus River,
+whatever," Andy cheered. "We're goin' to
+Fort Pelican when we has the boat fixed up,
+and she's 'most done."</p>
+
+<p>After dinner they settled to the task. Two
+of the narrow boards which they had prepared
+were required to cover the break, which occurred
+between two braces. The edges of the boards
+where they were to join were whittled straight,
+that the joint might be made as tight as
+possible. Then David held them in place
+while Andy marked the position for the holes
+through which the spruce root thongs were to
+pass.</p>
+
+<p>Four holes were to be cut in each end of both
+boards, and holes to match in the bottom of
+the boat, and in an hour they were neatly
+reamed out. When Andy removed his thongs
+<a name="Page_117" id="Page_117"></a>from the water they were quite soft and pliable,
+and proved to be strong and tough.</p>
+
+<p>Andy lashed the boards into place, threading
+the thongs through the holes and drawing
+them round the brace several times at each
+place where provision had been made for them.
+Thus a dozen thicknesses of fibre bound the
+boards to the brace at each set of holes.</p>
+
+<p>It was now necessary to collect the spruce
+gum and prepare it. Gum was plentiful
+enough, and in half an hour they had collected
+enough to half fill the frying-pan. To this
+was added a little lard, and the gum and
+grease melted over the fire and thoroughly
+mixed.</p>
+
+<p>"What you puttin' the grease in for?"
+asked Jamie curiously.</p>
+
+<p>"So when we pours un in the cracks and she
+hardens she won't be brittle and crack," David
+explained.</p>
+
+<p>The hot mixture was now poured into the
+joints between the boards and at all points
+where the new boards came into contact with
+the boat, and into the holes where the lashings
+occurred. In a few minutes it hardened, and
+the boys surveyed their work with pride and
+satisfaction.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118"></a>"Now we'll try un," said David, "and see
+if she leaks."</p>
+
+<p>"She'll never leak where she's mended,"
+asserted Andy.</p>
+
+<p>They slipped the boat into the water and
+Andy's prediction proved true. Not a drop
+of water oozed through the joints, and the boat
+was as snug and tight and seaworthy as any
+boat that ever floated.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis too late to start to-night," said David,
+"but we'll be away at crack o' dawn in the
+marnin', whatever. 'Tis fine they left the sail
+and oars."</p>
+
+<p>And at crack of dawn in the morning the
+boys were away. The day was misty and disagreeable,
+but David and Andy knew the way
+as well as you and I know our city streets.
+They rounded the Devil's Arm, a friendly tide
+helped them through the narrows, and in mid-forenoon
+the low white buildings of Fort
+Pelican appeared in misty outline through the
+fog. A few minutes later they swung alongside
+the Fort Pelican jetty, and there, to their
+amazement, firmly tied to the jetty, lay their
+own big boat.</p>
+
+<p>No one about the Post could explain whence
+the boat had come or how it reached the jetty.
+<a name="Page_119" id="Page_119"></a>The Post servants stated that they had not
+noticed it until after the departure of the lumber
+steamer. They had recognized it as Thomas
+Angus's boat, for in that country men know
+each other's boats as our country folk know
+their neighbours' horses.</p>
+
+<p>The lumber ship had arrived on the morning
+of the gale, and had anchored in the harbour
+awaiting the arrival of one of the company's
+officers on the mail boat. The mail boat had
+arrived the previous morning, and both the
+mail boat and lumber ship had steamed away
+shortly after the mail boat's arrival. Many
+lumbermen had been ashore. If any of them
+had come in the boat they had mingled among
+the others and had departed either on the
+lumber ship, which had gone up the Bay to
+Grampus River, or on the mail boat to Newfoundland.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm thinkin'," said David, "whoever 'twere
+took Lem's silver fox and our boat went to
+Newfoundland to sell the fur."</p>
+
+<p>"There's no doubtin' <i>that</i>," agreed Andy.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII</h3>
+
+<h2>TRAILING THE HALF-BREED</h2>
+
+
+<p>Eli Horn paused in the enclosed porch
+to shoulder his provision pack, left there
+upon his arrival home earlier in the evening.
+He was passing from the porch when Doctor
+Joe opened the door.</p>
+
+<p>"Eli," said Doctor Joe, closing the door
+behind him, "may I have a word with you?"</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, sir," and Eli stopped.</p>
+
+<p>"I just wished to speak a word of warning,"
+said Doctor Joe quietly. "Be cautious, Eli,
+and do nothing you'll regret. Don't be too
+hasty. We suspect Indian Jake, but none
+of us knows certainly that he shot your father
+or took the silver fox skin."</p>
+
+<p>"There's no doubtin' he took un! Pop
+says he took un, and he knows. I'm goin'
+to get the silver if I has to kill Injun Jake."</p>
+
+<p>Eli spoke in even, quiet tones, but with the
+<a name="Page_121" id="Page_121"></a>dogged determination of the man trained to
+pit his powers of endurance against Nature
+and the wilderness. He gave no suggestion of
+boastfulness, but rather of the man who has
+an ordinary duty to perform, and is bent upon
+doing it to the best of his ability.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't you think you had better wait and
+start in the morning? It's a nasty night to
+be out," Doctor Joe suggested. "'Twill be
+hard to make your way to-night with the wind
+against you as well as the dark. If you wait
+until morning it will give us time to talk things
+over."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll not stop till I gets the silver," Eli
+stubbornly declared, "and I'll get un or kill
+Injun Jake."</p>
+
+<p>"See here, Eli," Doctor Joe laid his hand
+on Eli's arm, "your father says he was not
+shot until sundown. Indian Jake was at our
+camp at Flat Point within the hour after sundown.
+He never could have paddled that
+distance against a down wind in an hour.
+The boys and I were four hours coming over
+here from Flat Point Camp, and I know Indian
+Jake could not have covered the distance in
+anything like an hour."</p>
+
+<p>"'Twere some trick of his! He shot un and
+<a name="Page_122" id="Page_122"></a>he took the silver!" Eli insisted. "Good-bye,
+sir. I've got to be goin' or he'll slip away
+from me."</p>
+
+<p>"Be careful, Eli," Doctor Joe pleaded.
+"Don't shoot unless you're forced to do so
+to protect yourself."</p>
+
+<p>"'Twill be Injun Jake'll have to be careful,"
+returned Eli as he strode away in the darkness,
+and Doctor Joe knew that Eli had it in his
+heart to do murder.</p>
+
+<p>The night was pitchy black and a drizzling
+rain was falling, but Eli had often travelled
+on as dark nights, and he was determined.
+He chose a light skiff rigged with a leg-o'-mutton
+sail. The wind was against him and
+with the sail reefed and the mast unstepped
+and stowed in the bottom of the boat, he slipped
+a pair of oars into the locks and with strong,
+even strokes pulled away, hugging the shore,
+that he might take advantage of the lee of
+the land.</p>
+
+<p>Presently the drizzle became a downpour,
+but Eli, indifferent to wind and weather, rowed
+tirelessly on. There was a dangerous turn
+to be made around Flat Point. Here for a
+time he lost the friendly shelter of the land,
+and continuous and tremendous effort was
+<a name="Page_123" id="Page_123"></a>called for in the rough seas; but, guided by
+the roar of the breakers on the shore, he compassed
+it and presently fell again under the
+protection of the land.</p>
+
+<p>With all his effort Eli had not progressed
+a quarter of the distance toward The Jug
+when dawn broke. With the first light he made
+a safe landing, cut a stick of standing dead
+timber, chopped off the butt, and splitting it
+that he might get at the dry core, whittled
+some shavings and lighted a fire. His provision
+bag was well filled. No Labradorman
+travels otherwise. A kettle of hot tea sweetened
+with molasses, a pan of fried fat pork and some
+hard bread (hardtack) satisfied his hunger.</p>
+
+<p>The wind was rising and the rain was flying
+in blinding sheets, but the shore still protected
+him, and the moment his simple breakfast
+was eaten Eli again set forward. Presently,
+however, another long point projected out
+into the Bay to force him into the open. He
+turned about in his boat and for several minutes
+studied the white-capped seas beyond the point.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll try un," he muttered, and settled again
+to his oars.</p>
+
+<p>But try as he would Eli could not force his
+light craft against the wind, and at length he
+<a name="Page_124" id="Page_124"></a>reluctantly dropped back again under the lee
+of the land and went ashore.</p>
+
+<p>"There'll be no goin' on to-day," he admitted.
+"I'll have to make camp whatever."</p>
+
+<p>Under the shelter of the thick spruce forest
+where he was fended from the gale and drive
+of the rain, he cut a score of poles. One of
+them, thicker and stiffer than the others, he
+lashed between two trees at a height of perhaps
+four feet. At intervals of three or four inches
+he rested the remaining poles against the one
+lashed to the trees, arranging them at an angle
+of fifty-five degrees and aligning the butts of
+the poles evenly upon the ground. These
+he covered with a mass of boughs and marsh
+grass as a thatching. The roof thatched to
+his satisfaction, he broke a quantity of boughs
+and with some care prepared a bed under the
+lean-to.</p>
+
+<p>His shelter and bed completed, he cut and
+piled a quantity of dry logs at one end of the
+lean-to. Then he felled two green trees and
+cut the trunks into four-foot lengths. Two
+of these he placed directly in front of the
+shelter and two feet apart, at right angles to
+the shelter. Across the ends of the logs farthest
+from his bed he piled three of the green sticks
+<a name="Page_125" id="Page_125"></a>to serve as a backlog, and in front of these
+lighted his fire. When it was blazing freely
+he piled upon it, and in front of the green
+backlogs, several of the logs of dry wood.</p>
+
+<p>Despite the rain, the fire burned freely, and
+presently the interior of Eli's lean-to was warm
+and comfortable. He now removed his rain-soaked
+jacket and moleskin trousers and suspended
+them from the ridge-pole, where they
+would receive the benefit of the heat and
+gradually dry.</p>
+
+<p>Stripped to his underclothing, Eli crouched
+before the fire beneath the front of the shelter.
+At intervals he turned his back and sides and
+chest toward the heat and in the course of an
+hour succeeded in drying his underclothing to
+his satisfaction. His moleskin trousers were
+still damp, but he donned them, and renewing
+the fire he stretched himself luxuriously for
+a long and much needed rest.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX"></a>CHAPTER IX</h3>
+
+<h2>ELI SURPRISES INDIAN JAKE</h2>
+
+
+<p>When Eli awoke late in the afternoon the
+rain had ceased, but the wind was blowing
+a living gale. There was a roar and boom and
+thunder of breakers down on the point and
+echoing far away along the coast. The wind
+shrieked and moaned through the forest.</p>
+
+<p>Under his shelter beneath the thick spruce
+trees, however, Eli was well enough protected.
+He renewed the fire, which had burned to
+embers, and prepared dinner. The storm that
+prevented him from travelling would also hold
+Indian Jake a prisoner. This thought yielded
+him a degree of satisfaction.</p>
+
+<p>He took no advantage of the leisure to
+reconsider and weigh the circumstantial evidence
+against Indian Jake. He had accepted it as
+conclusive proof of the half-breed's guilt and
+he had already convicted him of the crime.
+Once Eli had arrived at a conclusion his mind
+<a name="Page_127" id="Page_127"></a>was closed to any line of reasoning that might
+tend to controvert that conclusion. He prided
+himself upon this characteristic as strength of
+will, while in reality it was a weakness. But
+Eli was like many another man who has enjoyed
+greater opportunities in the world than
+ever fell to Eli's lot.</p>
+
+<p>Once Eli had set himself upon a trail he never
+turned his back upon the object he sought or
+weakened in his determination to attain it.
+His object now was to overtake Indian Jake
+and have the matter out with the half-breed
+once and for all. Well directed, this trait of
+unyielding determination is an excellent one.
+It is the foundation of success in life if the
+object sought is a worthy one. But in this
+instance Eli's objective was not alone the
+recovery of the silver fox skin, though this was
+the chief incentive. Coupled with it was a
+desire for vengeance, prompted by hate, and
+vengeance is the child of the weakest and
+meanest of human passions.</p>
+
+<p>When Eli had eaten he shouldered his rifle
+and strolled back into the forest. Presently
+he flushed a covey of spruce grouse, which
+rose from the ground and settled in a tree.
+Flinging his rifle to his shoulder, he fired and
+<a name="Page_128" id="Page_128"></a>a grouse tumbled to the ground. He fired
+again, and another fell. The living birds,
+with a great noise of wings, now abandoned the
+tree and Eli picked up the two victims. He
+had clipped their heads off neatly. This he
+observed with satisfaction. His rifle shot true
+and his aim was steady. What chance could
+Indian Jake have against such skill as that?</p>
+
+<p>Eli plucked the birds immediately, while
+they were warm, for delay would set the feathers,
+and his game being sufficient for his present
+needs, he returned to his bivouac on the point.</p>
+
+<p>It was mid-afternoon the following day before
+the wind and rain had so far subsided as to
+permit Eli to turn the point and proceed upon
+his journey. Even then, with all his effort,
+the progress he made against the north-west
+breeze was so slow that it was not until the
+following forenoon that he reached The Jug.
+Thomas saw him coming and was on the jetty
+to welcome him.</p>
+
+<p>"How be you, Eli?" Thomas greeted. "I'm
+wonderful glad to see you. Come right up and
+have a cup o' tea."</p>
+
+<p>"How be you, Thomas? Is Injun Jake
+here?"</p>
+
+<p>"He were here," said Thomas, "but he
+<a name="Page_129" id="Page_129"></a>only stops one day to help me get the outfit
+ready and then he goes on in his canoe to hunt
+bear up the Nascaupee River whilst he waits
+there for me to go to the Seal Lake trails.
+You want to see he?"</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, and I'm goin' to see whatever!"</p>
+
+<p>While Eli had a snack to eat and a cup of
+tea with Thomas and Margaret he told Thomas
+of Indian Jake's call upon his father, of the
+shooting and of the robbery which followed.</p>
+
+<p>"Injun Jake turns back after leavin' and
+shoots Pop and takes the silver," he concluded,
+"and I'm goin' to get the silver whatever,
+even if I has to shoot Injun Jake to get un!"</p>
+
+<p>"Is you sure, now, 'twere Injun Jake does
+un?" asked Thomas, unwilling to believe his
+friend and partner capable of such treachery.
+By disposition Thomas was naturally cautious
+of passing judgment or of accusing anyone of
+misdeed without conclusive proof.</p>
+
+<p>"There's no doubtin' that!" insisted Eli.
+"There was nobody else to do un. 'Twere
+Injun Jake."</p>
+
+<p>A shift of wind to the southward assisted
+Eli on his way. Early that evening he reached
+the Hudson's Bay Company's post, twenty
+miles west of The Jug. Here he stopped for
+<a name="Page_130" id="Page_130"></a>supper and learned from Zeke Hodge, the
+Post servant, that Indian Jake had passed up
+Grand Lake in his canoe two days before.
+Zeke expressed doubt as to Eli's finding the
+half-breed at the Nascaupee River. He stated
+it as his opinion that if Indian Jake were guilty
+of the crime, as he had no doubt, he was planning
+an escape and had in all probability immediately
+plunged into the interior, in which case he
+was already hopelessly beyond pursuit and
+had fled the Bay country for good and all.
+Like Eli, Zeke convicted the half-breed at once.</p>
+
+<p>The Eskimo Bay Post of the Hudson's Bay
+Company is the last inhabited dwelling as the
+traveller enters the wilderness; he might go
+on and on for a thousand miles to Hudson
+Bay and in the whole vast expanse of distance
+no other human habitation will he find. His
+camps will be pitched in the depths of forests
+or on desolate, naked barrens; and always,
+in forests or on barrens, he will hear the rush
+and roar of mighty rivers or the lapping waves
+of wide, far-reaching lakes. The timber wolf
+will startle him from sleep in the dead of night
+with its long, weird howl, rising and falling
+in dismal cadence, or the silence will be broken
+perchance by the wild, uncanny laugh of the
+<a name="Page_131" id="Page_131"></a>loon falling upon the darkness as a token of
+ill omen, but in all the vast land he will hear
+no human voice and he will find no human
+companionship.</p>
+
+<p>Indian Jake had told Thomas that he would
+camp above the mouth of the Nascaupee River,
+a dozen miles beyond the point where the river
+enters Grand Lake. It was a journey of sixty
+miles or more from the Post.</p>
+
+<p>Eli set out at once. Five miles up a short
+wide river brought him to Grand Lake, which
+here reached away before him to meet the
+horizon in the west, and at the foot of the lake
+he camped to await day, for the lake and the
+country before him were unfamiliar.</p>
+
+<p>Early in the afternoon of the third day
+after leaving the Post, Eli's boat turned into
+the wide mouth of the Nascaupee River, and
+keeping a sharp look-out, he rowed silently up
+the river. It was an hour before sundown
+when his eye caught the white of canvas among
+the trees a little way from the river.</p>
+
+<p>With much caution Eli drew his boat among
+the willows that lined the bank and made it
+fast. Slinging his cartridge bag over his
+shoulder, and with his rifle resting in the hollow
+of his arm, ready for instant action, he crept
+<a name="Page_132" id="Page_132"></a>forward toward Indian Jake's camp. Taking
+advantage of the cover of brush, he moved
+with extreme caution until he had the tent and
+surroundings under observation.</p>
+
+<p>There was no movement about the camp and
+the fire was dead. It was plain Indian Jake
+had not returned for the evening. Eli crouched
+and waited, as a cat crouches and waits patiently
+for its prey.</p>
+
+<p>Presently there was the sound of a breaking
+twig and a moment later Indian Jake, with
+his rifle on his arm, appeared out of the forest.</p>
+
+<p>Eli, his rifle levelled at Indian Jake, rose
+to his feet with the command:</p>
+
+<p>"You stand where you is; drop your gun!"</p>
+
+<p>"Why, how do, Eli? What's up?" Indian
+Jake greeted. "What's bringin' you to the
+Nascaupee?"</p>
+
+<p>"You!" Eli's face was hard with hate.
+"'Tis you brings me here, you thief! I wants
+the silver you takes when you shoots father,
+and 'tis well for you Doctor Joe comes and
+saves he from dyin' or I'd been droppin' a
+bullet in your heart with nary a warnin'!"</p>
+
+<p>"What you meanin' by that?"</p>
+
+<p>"Be you givin' up the silver?"</p>
+
+<p>"No!"</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><a name="Page_132a" id="Page_132a"></a></p>
+<p class="figcenter" style="width: 726px;">
+<img src="images/image004.jpg" width="726" height="500" alt="&quot;YOU STAND WHERE YOU IS AND DROP YOUR GUN&quot;" title="&quot;YOU STAND WHERE YOU IS AND DROP YOUR GUN&quot;" />
+<span class="caption">&quot;YOU STAND WHERE YOU IS AND DROP YOUR GUN&quot;</span>
+</p>
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133"></a>"I say again, give me that silver fox you
+stole from father!"</p>
+
+<p>Indian Jake's small hawk eyes were narrowing.
+He made no answer, but slipped his right hand
+forward toward the trigger of his rifle, though
+the barrel of the rifle still rested in the hollow
+of his left arm.</p>
+
+<p>"Drop un!" Eli commanded, observing the
+movement. "Drop that gun on the ground!"</p>
+
+<p>Indian Jake stood like a statue, eyeing Eli,
+but he made no movement.</p>
+
+<p>"I said drop un!" Eli's voice was cold
+and hard as steel. He was in deadly earnest.
+"If you tries to raise un or don't drop un
+before I count ten I'll put a bullet in your
+heart!"</p>
+
+<p>Indian Jake might have been of chiselled
+stone. He did not move a muscle or wink
+an eye-lash but his small eyes were centred
+on every motion Eli made. He still held his
+rifle, the barrel resting in the hollow of his left
+arm, his right hand clutching the stock behind
+the hammer, his finger an inch from the trigger.</p>
+
+<p>For an instant there was a death-like silence.
+Then Eli began to count:</p>
+
+<p>"One&mdash;two&mdash;three&mdash;four&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>The words fell like strokes of a hammer upon
+<a name="Page_134" id="Page_134"></a>an anvil. Eli intended to shoot. He was a
+man of his word. He made no threat that he
+was not prepared to execute, and Indian Jake
+knew that Eli would shoot on the count of ten.</p>
+
+<p>"Five&mdash;six&mdash;seven&mdash;eight&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>Still Indian Jake made no move save that
+the little hawk eyes had narrowed to slits.
+He did not drop his gun. From all the indications,
+he did not hear Eli's count.</p>
+
+<p>"Nine&mdash;ten!"</p>
+
+<p>True to his threat, Eli's rifle rang out with
+the last word of his count.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X"></a>CHAPTER X</h3>
+
+<h2>THE END OF ELI'S HUNT</h2>
+
+
+<p>Indian Jake, quick as a cat, had thrown
+himself upon the ground with Eli's last
+count. Like the loon that dives at the flash
+of the hunter's gun, he was a fraction of a second
+quicker than Eli. Now, lying prone, his rifle
+at his shoulder, he had Eli covered, and the
+chamber of Eli's rifle was empty.</p>
+
+<p>"Drop that gun!" he commanded.</p>
+
+<p>Eli, believing in the first instant that Indian
+Jake had fallen as the result of the shot, was
+taken wholly by surprise. He stood dazed
+and dumb with the smoking rifle in his hand.
+He did not at once realize that the half-breed
+had him covered. His brain did not work
+as rapidly as Indian Jake's. His immediate
+sensation as he heard Indian Jake's voice was
+one of thankfulness that, after all, there was
+no stain of murder on his soul. Even yet he
+had no doubt Indian Jake was wounded. He
+<a name="Page_136" id="Page_136"></a>had taken deadly aim, and he could not understand
+how any escape could have been possible.</p>
+
+<p>"Drop that gun!" Indian Jake repeated.
+"I won't count. I'll shoot."</p>
+
+<p>Eli's brain at last grasped the situation.
+Indian Jake was grinning broadly, and it
+seemed to Eli the most malicious grin he had
+ever beheld. He did not question Indian Jake's
+determination to shoot. It was too evident
+that the half-breed, grinning like a demon,
+was in a desperate mood. Eli dropped his
+rifle as though it were red hot and burned his
+hands.</p>
+
+<p>"Step out here!" Indian Jake, rising to
+his feet, indicated an open space near the tent.</p>
+
+<p>Eli did as he was told.</p>
+
+<p>"Shake the ca'tridges out of your bag on
+the ground!"</p>
+
+<p>Eli turned his cartridge bag over, and the
+cartridges which it contained rattled to the
+ground.</p>
+
+<p>"Turn your pockets out!"</p>
+
+<p>A turning of the pockets disclosed no further
+ammunition.</p>
+
+<p>Indian Jake took Eli's rifle from the ground,
+emptied the magazine, and placed the rifle
+in the tent.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137"></a>"Where's your boat?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Just down here."</p>
+
+<p>"You go ahead. Show me."</p>
+
+<p>Eli guided Indian Jake to the boat, and while
+he remained on the bank under threat of the
+rifle, the half-breed went through his belongings
+in the boat in a further search for ammunition.
+Satisfied that there was none, he replaced the
+things as he had found them, and was grinning
+amiably when he rejoined Eli upon the bank.</p>
+
+<p>"Come 'long up to camp," he invited, quite
+as though Eli were a most welcome guest.</p>
+
+<p>"Give me that silver fox!" Eli's anger
+had mastered his surprise.</p>
+
+<p>"I won't give un to you, but don't be mad,
+Eli," Indian Jake grinned in vast enjoyment.</p>
+
+<p>"You stole un!" Eli burst out. "And
+you were thinkin' to do murder!"</p>
+
+<p>"Did I now?"</p>
+
+<p>"You did!"</p>
+
+<p>Indian Jake did not deign to deny or confess.
+Eli, at his command, returned to camp. Indian
+Jake handed him the tea-kettle.</p>
+
+<p>"Fill un at the river," he directed.</p>
+
+<p>While Eli obeyed silently and sullenly,
+Indian Jake lighted a fire, and when Eli returned
+put the kettle on. Then he brought
+<a name="Page_138" id="Page_138"></a>forth his frying-pan, filled it with sliced venison,
+and as he placed it over the fire, remarked:</p>
+
+<p>"Knocked a buck down this mornin'."</p>
+
+<p>Eli said nothing. The odour of frying venison
+was pleasant. Eli was hungry, and when the
+venison was fried and tea made, he swallowed
+his pride and silently accepted Indian Jake's
+invitation to eat.</p>
+
+<p>When they had finished, Indian Jake cut a
+large joint of venison, and presented it to
+Eli with his empty rifle, remarking as he
+did so:</p>
+
+<p>"The deer's meat's a surprise. I like to
+surprise folks. Taste good goin' home. I'll
+keep the ca'tridges. You might hurt somebody
+if you had un. You'll get quite a piece
+down before you camp to-night."</p>
+
+<p>"Were you takin' that silver?" asked Eli,
+changing his accusation to a question.</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe I were and maybe I weren't,"
+Indian Jake grinned. "'Twouldn't do me any
+good to tell you if I had un, and if I told you
+I didn't have un you wouldn't believe me.
+Maybe I've got un. You better be goin'. I'd
+ask you to stay, Eli, and I'd like to have
+you, but you don't like me and you'd better
+go on."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139"></a>"I don't want the deer's meat," said Eli in
+sullen resentment.</p>
+
+<p>"You ain't got any ca'tridges, and you
+can't shoot any fresh meat," insisted Indian
+Jake, adding with a grin: "She'll go good.
+Take un along, I got plenty. It's just a little
+surprise present for you bein' so kind as not
+to shoot me."</p>
+
+<p>Eli, doubtless deciding that he had better
+take what he could get, though a bit of venison
+was small compensation for a silver fox, accepted
+the meat. Indian Jake accompanied him to
+the boat, and as he dropped down the river
+he could see Indian Jake still on the bank
+watching him until he turned a bend.</p>
+
+<p>Without cartridges for his rifle, Eli felt
+himself as helpless as a wolf without teeth or
+a cat without claws. He was subdued and
+humbled. He had had Indian Jake completely
+in his power, and through delay in
+taking prompt advantage of his position, had
+permitted the half-breed to capture and disarm
+him.</p>
+
+<p>The thought increased his anger toward
+Indian Jake. He had no doubt the man had
+the silver fox in his possession. If there had
+been any doubt in the first instance that Indian
+<a name="Page_140" id="Page_140"></a>Jake was guilty, and Eli had never admitted
+that there was doubt, he was now entirely
+satisfied of the half-breed's guilt. Indian Jake,
+indeed, had quite boldly stated that he "might"
+have it, and Eli accepted this as an admission
+that he <i>did</i> have it.</p>
+
+<p>"There'll be no use getting more ca'tridges
+and goin' back," Eli mused. "He's had a
+warnin' and he'll not bide in that camp another
+day. He'll flee the country."</p>
+
+<p>Then Eli's thoughts turned to his old father
+and mother.</p>
+
+<p>"The silver's gone, and it leaves Pop and
+Mother in a bad way," he mused. "They've
+been fondlin' that skin half the winter. Pop's
+had un out a hundred times to see how fine
+and black 'twere, and shook un out to see how
+thick and deep the fur is. And they been
+countin' and countin' on the things they'd
+be gettin' and needs, and can't get now she's
+gone. And they been countin' on the money
+they'd have to lay by for their feeble days
+when they needs un. They'll never get over
+mournin' the loss of un. 'Twere worth a
+fortune, and Pop'll never cotch another. He
+were hopin' and hopin' every year as long as
+I remembers to cotch a silver, and none ever
+<a name="Page_141" id="Page_141"></a>comes to his traps till this un comes. And now
+she's gone!"</p>
+
+<p>Perhaps had the silver fox skin been Eli's
+own, and perhaps had his father and mother
+not built so many hopes and laid so many
+plans upon the little fortune it was to have
+brought them, Eli would never have ventured
+to the verge of murder to recover it. Even
+now, with all his regrets, he thanked God
+from the bottom of his heart that he had not
+killed Indian Jake and stained his hands with
+blood.</p>
+
+<p>"'Twere the mercy of God sent the bullet
+abroad," said he reverently. "Indian Jake's a
+thief and he deserves to be killed, but if I'd killed
+he I'd never rested an easy hour again while
+I lives. But I might o' clipped his trigger
+hand, whatever," he thought with regret. "I
+can clip off the head of a pa'tridge every time,
+and I might have clipped his hand, and got
+the skin and took he back for Doctor Joe
+to fix up."</p>
+
+<p>Three days later Eli pulled his boat wearily
+into The Jug. The boys had returned, and
+with Thomas they met him on the jetty.</p>
+
+<p>"Did you find Injun Jake?" Thomas asked
+anxiously.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142"></a>"Aye," said Eli, "he were there."</p>
+
+<p>Eli volunteered no further details for a
+moment. Then he added:</p>
+
+<p>"I didn't kill he, thank the Lord, but he's
+got the silver. He said he had un, and he took
+my ca'tridges away from me."</p>
+
+<p>"Said he had un? Now, that's strange&mdash;wonderful
+strange. Come in, Eli, supper's
+ready," Thomas invited, manifestly relieved
+that Eli had not succeeded in accomplishing
+his rash purpose. "You'll bide the night
+with us, and while you eats tell us about un,
+and the lads'll tell what were happenin' to
+they."</p>
+
+<p>Margaret was setting the table. She greeted
+Eli cordially, and arranged a plate for him
+while he washed at the basin behind the stove.</p>
+
+<p>"Come," invited Thomas, "set in. We've
+got a wonderful treat."</p>
+
+<p>"What be that, now?" asked Eli as Margaret
+placed a dish of steaming, mealy boiled potatoes
+upon the table.</p>
+
+<p>"Potaters," Thomas announced grandly.
+"Doctor Joe brings un on the mail boat from
+where he's been, and onions too. Margaret,
+peel some onions and set un on for Eli. They's
+fine just as they is without cookin'."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143"></a>The onions came, and when thanks had been
+offered Eli tasted his first potato.</p>
+
+<p>"They is fine, now! Wonderful fine eatin',"
+he declared.</p>
+
+<p>"Try an onion, now. They's fine, too,"
+Thomas urged.</p>
+
+<p>Eli took an onion.</p>
+
+<p>"She has a strange smell," he observed before
+biting into it.</p>
+
+<p>Eli took a liberal mouthful of the onion.
+He began to chew it. A strained look spread
+over his face. Tears filled his eyes. But Eli
+was brave, and he never flinched.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis fine, I like un wonderful fine," Eli
+volunteered presently, adding, "if she didn't
+burn so bad."</p>
+
+<p>"Take just a bit at a time," advised Thomas,
+laughing heartily, "and eat un with bread
+or potaters and you won't notice the burn
+of un."</p>
+
+<p>Presently Eli told of his experiences with
+Indian Jake, and Andy told of the tracks he
+had seen under the window, and all of the
+boys told of what had happened on the island,
+the theft of the boat, the tracks of the nailed
+boots and the discovery of the boat at Fort
+Pelican.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144"></a>Then Eli made an announcement that again
+laid the burden of suspicion more strongly
+than ever upon Indian Jake.</p>
+
+<p>"I were workin' at the lumber camps a week
+this summer helpin' they out," said Eli.
+"Whilst I were there Indian Jake comes and
+trades a pair of skin boots with one of the lumber
+men for a pair of their boots, the kind with
+nails in un. He the same as says he has the
+fur, and 'twere he took un."</p>
+
+<p>"Injun Jake wears skin boots when he come
+to our camp on Flat P'int," said David.</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, 'tis likely," admitted Eli. "He'd be
+wearin' skin boots in the canoe, whatever.
+The nailed boots would be hard on the canoe.
+He uses the nailed boots trampin' about, but
+he'd change un when he travels in his canoe."</p>
+
+<p>The whole question was canvassed pro and
+con, and due consideration given to the length
+of time that Indian Jake must have consumed
+in passing from Horn's Bight to Flat Point.
+This was alone sufficient in the mind of Thomas
+and the boys to lift all suspicion from Indian
+Jake, but Eli still held stubbornly to the
+opposite view.</p>
+
+<p>Two days later, and on the eve of Thomas's
+departure for the trails, Doctor Joe returned.
+<a name="Page_145" id="Page_145"></a>Lem had so far recovered that a further stay
+at Horn's Bight was unnecessary.</p>
+
+<p>Thomas and Doctor Joe quietly discussed
+the shooting incident. Lem, it appeared, had
+later decided that he may have been shot
+much earlier in the afternoon than sundown.
+What had occurred had fallen into the hazy
+uncertainty of a dream.</p>
+
+<p>"What kind of a rifle does Indian Jake use?"
+asked Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p>"A thirty-eight fifty-five," said Thomas.</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe drew from his pocket the bullet
+extracted from Lem's wound. Thomas examined
+it critically.</p>
+
+<p>"There's no doubtin' 'tis a thirty-eight fifty-five,"
+he admitted. "'Tis true Injun Jake
+gets a pair of nailed boots like the lumber
+folk wears. But Injun Jake'll tell me whether
+'twere he shot Lem. Injun Jake'll be fair
+about un with me whatever. 'Tis hard for
+me to believe he did un. If he did, he'll be
+gone from the Nascaupee when I gets there.
+If he didn't, I'll find he waitin'!"</p>
+
+<p>"Let us hope he'll be there, and let us hope
+he's innocent," said Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p>Some day and in some way every sin is
+punished and every criminal is discovered. It
+<a name="Page_146" id="Page_146"></a>is an immutable law of God that he who does
+wrong must atone for the wrong. We do
+not always know how the punishment is brought
+about, but the guilty one knows. And so
+with the shooting and robbery of Lem Horn.
+Many months were to pass before the mystery
+was to be solved, and then the revelation
+was to come in a startling manner in the course
+of an adventure amid the deep snows of winter.</p>
+
+<p>Thomas sailed away the following morning.
+They watched his boat pass down through
+The Jug and out into the Bay, and then the
+silence of the wilderness closed upon him,
+and no word came as to whether or no Indian
+Jake met him at the Nascaupee River camp.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI"></a>CHAPTER XI</h3>
+
+<h2>THE LETTER IN THE CAIRN</h2>
+
+
+<p>In Labrador September is the pleasantest
+month of the year. It is a period of
+calm when fogs and mists and cold dreary
+rains, so frequent during July and the early
+half of August, are past, and Nature holds her
+breath before launching upon the world the
+bitter blasts and blizzards and awful cold of
+a sub-arctic winter. There are days and days
+together when the azure of the sky remains
+unmarred by clouds, and the sun shines uninterruptedly.
+The air, brilliantly transparent,
+carries a twang of frost. Evening is bathed
+in an effulgence of colour. The sky flames
+in startling reds and yellows blending into
+opals and turquoise, with the shadowy hills
+lying in a purple haze in the west.</p>
+
+<p>Then comes night and the aurora. Wavering
+fingers of light steal up from the northern
+horizon. Higher and higher they climb until
+<a name="Page_148" id="Page_148"></a>they have reached and crossed the zenith.
+From the north they spread to the east and
+to the west until the whole sky is aflame with
+shimmering fire of marvellous changing colours
+varying from darkest purple to dazzling white.</p>
+
+<p>The dark green of the spruce and balsam
+forests is splotched with golden yellow where
+the magic touch of the frost king has laid his
+fingers and worked a miracle upon groves of
+tamaracks. The leaves of the aspen and white
+birch have fallen, and the flowers have faded.</p>
+
+<p>Spruce grouse chickens, full grown now, rise
+in coveys with much noise of wing, and perch
+in trees looking down unafraid upon any who
+intrude upon their forest home. Ptarmigans,
+still in their coat of mottled brown and white,
+gather in flocks upon the naked hills to feed,
+where upland cranberries cover the ground in
+red masses; or on the edge of marshes where
+bake apple berries have changed from brilliant
+red to delicate salmon pink and offer a sweet
+and wholesome feast.</p>
+
+<p>The honk and quack of wild geese and ducks,
+southward bound in great flocks, disturbs the
+silence of every inlet and cove and bight, where
+the wild fowl pause for a time to rest and feed
+upon the grasses.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149"></a>After Thomas's departure Doctor Joe and
+the boys tidied and snugged things up for the
+winter, and many a fine hunt they had, mornings
+and evenings, in the edge of a near-by marsh
+through which a brook coursed to join the sea.
+Hunting geese and ducks was indeed a duty,
+for they must needs depend upon the hunt
+for no small share of their living. It was a
+duty they enjoyed, however. Skill and a
+steady hand and a quick eye are necessary
+to success, and they never failed to return
+with a full bag.</p>
+
+<p>The weather was now cold enough to keep
+the birds sweet and fresh, and before September
+closed a full two score of fine fat geese were
+hanging in the enclosed lean-to shed with a
+promise of many good dinners in the future.</p>
+
+<p>Between the hunting and the work about
+home there was no time to be dawdled vainly
+away. When there was nothing more pressing
+the wood-pile always stood suggestively near
+the door inviting attention, and it was necessary
+to saw and split a vast deal of wood to keep
+the big box stove supplied, for it had a great
+maw and would develop a marvellous appetite
+when the weather grew cold.</p>
+
+<p>No extended travelling was possible for
+<a name="Page_150" id="Page_150"></a>Doctor Joe on his errands of mercy until the
+sea should freeze and dogs and sledge could
+be called into service. But during the fine
+September weather he and the boys made
+two short trips up the Bay, where there was
+ailing in some of the families.</p>
+
+<p>In the course of these excursions they took
+occasion to visit Let-in-Cove, which lay just
+outside Grampus River, where the new lumber
+camps were situated, and also Snug Cove and
+Tuggle Bight, a little farther on. At Let-in-Cove
+Peter and Lige Sparks, at Snug Cove
+Obadiah Button and Micah Dunk, and at
+Tuggle Bight Seth Muggs were enlisted in the
+scout troop, and a handbook left at each
+place. These, indeed, with the three Anguses,
+were the only boys of scout age within a radius
+of fifty miles of The Jug.</p>
+
+<p>There was great excitement among the lads,
+and Doctor Joe proudly declared that there
+would be no finer or more efficient troop of
+scouts in all the world than his little troop of
+eight when they had become familiar with
+their duties.</p>
+
+<p>A new field and a broader vision of life was
+to open to these Labrador lads, whose life
+was of necessity circumscribed. They had never
+<a name="Page_151" id="Page_151"></a>been given the opportunity to play as boys play
+in more favoured lands. They had never known
+the joys of football or cricket or the hundred
+other fine, health-giving games that are a part
+of the life of every English or Canadian boy.
+They had never seen a circus or a moving picture
+and they had never been in a schoolroom in
+their lives.</p>
+
+<p>This opportunity to play and study as other
+boys play and study in other lands was the
+thing, perhaps, they longed for above all else.
+Doctor Joe had inspired them with ambition.
+They hungered to learn and here was the
+Handbook with many things in it to study,
+and through Doctor Joe and the book they
+were to learn the joy of play.</p>
+
+<p>The new recruits to the troop, however, as
+well as the Angus boys, had been close students
+of their native wilderness. Their eyes were
+sharp and their ears were quick. They knew
+every tree and flower and plant that grew
+about them. They knew the birds and their
+calls and songs. They knew every animal, its
+cry and its habits of life. They knew the fish
+of the sea and lake and stream. All this
+was a part of their training for their future
+profession of hunters and fishermen.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152"></a>As hunters they had not learned to look
+upon the wild things of the woods as friends
+and associates. To them the animals were
+only beasts whose valuable pelts could be traded
+at the Post for necessaries of life or whose flesh
+was good to eat. Success in life depended
+upon man's ability to outwit and slay birds
+or animals, and the lads held for them none of
+the human sympathy that would have added
+so much to their own enjoyment.</p>
+
+<p>Now they were to have a new view of life.
+Doctor Joe was to open to them a wider, happier
+vista. It was not in the least to breed in them
+discontent with their circumscribed life, but
+rather to open to their consciousness the
+opportunities that lay within their reach, and
+to make their life richer and broader and vastly
+more worth while.</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe explained to the five recruits
+the Tenderfoot Scout requirements, much as
+he had explained them to David and Andy
+and Jamie. Wilderness dwellers who must
+take in and fix in the mind at a glance every
+unusual tree or stump or stone if they would
+find their trail, have a peculiar and remarkable
+gift of memory born of long practice and the
+fact that they must perforce depend upon
+<a name="Page_153" id="Page_153"></a>their ability to retain the things they see and
+hear. The lads, therefore, required no repetition,
+and learned their lessons with ease.</p>
+
+<p>Though they had never attended school they
+could all read, stumbling, to be sure, over the
+big words, but nevertheless grasping the meaning.
+Doctor Joe, during his years in the Bay, had
+taught not only the Angus boys but many of
+the other young people to read. Doctor Joe
+now marked the pages that they were to study,
+and before he and the Angus boys turned back
+across the Bay to The Jug it was agreed that
+the new troop should hold a week's camp
+to study and practise together. Hollow Cove,
+some five miles from The Jug, was to be the
+camping ground, and the first week in October
+was decided upon as the time.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll start to camp on Monday marnin' of
+that week," suggested David. "Come over
+to The Jug on Sunday. 'Twill be fine to have
+us all go to camp together."</p>
+
+<p>"Aye," agreed Micah, "'twill be now, and
+we'll come, and have a fine time."</p>
+
+<p>"And we'll all study about the scout things
+whilst we're in camp," piped up Jamie enthusiastically.</p>
+
+<p>"That we will now," David assured.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154"></a>"Lige, you and Peter bring a tent and stove,
+and all you need for setting up camp," Doctor
+Joe directed. "Can you bring one, too,
+Seth?"</p>
+
+<p>"Aye," said Seth, "I'll bring un, but we
+have no tent stove. Pop took un to the
+huntin'."</p>
+
+<p>"Obadiah or Micah may bring a stove.
+You have one, haven't you?" Doctor Joe
+asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Aye," said Obadiah, "I has one. I'll
+bring un along."</p>
+
+<p>"You three fix up an outfit amongst you.
+There'll be three in a tent," Doctor Joe explained.
+"Andy can go in with Peter and
+Lige, and I'll tent with Davy and Jamie."</p>
+
+<p>There was little else than the proposed
+camping expedition talked about on the return
+to The Jug, and in the days that followed
+David, Andy and Jamie devoted every spare
+moment to the study of first aid and signalling.
+Doctor Joe, with no end of patience, drilled
+them so thoroughly in first aid that they were
+soon really expert in applying bandages. He
+even instructed them in improvising splints
+and reducing fractures. In this secluded land,
+where for three hundred miles up and down
+<a name="Page_155" id="Page_155"></a>the coast there was no other surgeon than
+Doctor Joe, it was not unlikely that some day
+they would be called upon to set a leg or an
+arm.</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe was as ignorant, however, of
+the art of signalling as were the lads, and he
+must needs take it up from the very beginning
+and study with them. It was decided that
+they should learn both the semaphore and
+Morse codes, and Doctor Joe insisted that
+neither he nor the lads should consider the
+Second Class test satisfactorily passed until
+they had not only learned the codes but could
+send and receive messages at the rate of speed
+designated in the handbook as required for
+the First Class test.</p>
+
+<p>"It wouldn't be fair to the scouts in the
+big cities," he declared. "They have to learn
+a great many things that we already know
+how to do, like building fires, using the axe
+and knife, and tracking. Those are things
+we've been doing all our lives and won't have
+to practise. We must make it just as hard
+for ourselves to become Second Class Scouts
+as it is for the city lads. So we'll make the
+signalling test that much more difficult."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm thinkin' that's fine now," enthused
+<a name="Page_156" id="Page_156"></a>David, "and when we learn un we'll know
+that much more."</p>
+
+<p>"That's the idea!" said Doctor Joe. "And
+we'll not only learn the sixteen principal points
+of the compass, but we'll learn to box the
+compass to the quarter point as navigators
+do."</p>
+
+<p>"I can box un now," grinned David.</p>
+
+<p>"So can I box un!" Andy exclaimed.
+"Dad told me how, same as he told Davy."</p>
+
+<p>"And I can learn to box un easy," promised
+Jamie.</p>
+
+<p>Margaret joined them one fine day in the
+forest behind the cabin when they took their
+Second Class cooking test, and a jolly day
+they made of it. It was easy enough to roast
+a spruce grouse on the end of a stick. Even
+Jamie had done that many times. But Doctor
+Joe was called upon to solve the problem of
+cooking potatoes without cooking utensils, and
+he did it so satisfactorily that the lads practised
+it every day afterward for a week.</p>
+
+<p>He resorted to a simple and ordinary method.
+He dug a narrow trench about six inches deep.
+Upon this he built a fire, which he permitted
+to burn until there was a good accumulation
+of ashes. Then he pushed the fire back and
+<a name="Page_157" id="Page_157"></a>raked the ashes out of the trench. The potatoes
+were now placed in a row at the bottom of the
+trench and covered with a good layer of hot
+ashes. The fire was now drawn back over
+the ashes that covered the potatoes and permitted
+to burn briskly.</p>
+
+<p>At the end of an hour he brushed the fire
+back at one end sufficiently to allow a long
+slender splinter to be pushed down through the
+ashes and through a potato. The splinter did
+not penetrate the potato easily and the fire
+was drawn in again to burn for another quarter
+of an hour. Then it was raked out and the
+potatoes removed, to find that, while the skins
+were not in the least burned or even scorched,
+the potatoes were done to a turn.</p>
+
+<p>"You couldn't have baked them better in
+your oven, Margaret," laughed Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p>"I never could have baked un half as well,"
+admitted Margaret, adding, "'tis a wonderful
+way of cookin'."</p>
+
+<p>"Doctor Joe's fine cookin' everything,"
+declared Andy. "I always likes his cookin'
+wonderful well."</p>
+
+<p>"Thank you, Andy. That's high praise,"
+acknowledged Doctor Joe, "but I could learn
+a great deal about cooking from Margaret."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158"></a>"I just does plain cookin'," Margaret
+deprecated, but flushed with pleasure at the
+compliment.</p>
+
+<p>On the last day of September, which was
+a Friday, David and Doctor Joe crossed over
+to the Hudson's Bay Post and took Margaret
+with them for a visit to Kate Huddy, the
+Post servant's daughter, where she was to
+remain while the Scouts were enjoying their
+camp at Hollow Cove.</p>
+
+<p>David and Doctor Joe returned to The Jug
+on Saturday, and when the other members
+of the troop arrived in a boat on Sunday, had
+their own tent equipment and food packed
+and ready for the little expedition on Monday
+morning.</p>
+
+<p>It was a jolly meeting. The evening was
+cold, and when supper was eaten they gathered
+around the big box stove which crackled
+cheerfully, and Doctor Joe announced that as
+this was the first meeting of the troop they
+must organize and elect leaders, just as troops
+were organized everywhere else in the world.</p>
+
+<p>When he had thoroughly explained the
+necessary steps he read to them a brief constitution
+and by-laws which he had previously
+prepared. These he had them adopt in due
+<a name="Page_159" id="Page_159"></a>form, and then asked some one to nominate a
+patrol leader.</p>
+
+<p>Every one, with one accord, nominated
+David, and he was duly, solemnly, and unanimously
+elected.</p>
+
+<p>"Now," suggested Doctor Joe, "we must
+have an assistant patrol leader. Who shall
+it be?"</p>
+
+<p>"Andy," said Seth Muggs. "Andy's been to
+the trails and he knows more about un than
+anybody exceptin' Davy."</p>
+
+<p>"'Twouldn't be fair," objected Andy.
+"Davy's patrol leader. 'Tis but right we
+put in one of you that comes from across the
+Bay. I'm saying Peter Sparks, now."</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe agreed with Andy, and Peter
+Sparks was declared elected. Then Seth
+nominated Andy for scribe.</p>
+
+<p>"Because," Seth explained, "Andy'll be
+right handy to Doctor Joe all the time and
+Doctor Joe can help he to do the writin', and
+he needs help."</p>
+
+<p>When the election was completed Doctor
+Joe explained the duties of the officers and the
+necessity of obedience to them in the performance
+of scout duties.</p>
+
+<p>"Our troop is a team," said Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160"></a>"We must pull together. We are like a team
+of dogs hauling a komatik. If the dogs all
+follow the leader and pull together the best
+that ever they can they get somewhere. If
+they don't follow the leader, and one pulls in
+one direction and another pulls in a different
+direction and some don't pull at all, they never
+get anywhere and aren't of much use. Our
+troop is going to be the best we can make it,
+by all pulling together and doing the very best
+we know how.</p>
+
+<p>"We must always be ready to help other
+people at all times, as we promise to do in
+our oath. If we live up to that we'll do a great
+deal of good, first and last, up and down the
+Bay. If some one's life is in danger and we
+can help them even at the risk of our own we
+must help them. Everybody wants to be
+happy. There's nothing that will make us
+so happy as to do some fine thing every day
+that will make someone else happy.</p>
+
+<p>"We must train our brains and our hands
+so that we shall always be prepared to do the
+right thing and do it quickly. We must learn
+to keep our temper and not get angry. Let
+us take the hard knocks that come to us with
+a smile."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161"></a>The remainder of the evening was spent
+in playing some rollicking games that the lads
+had never heard of before, and which Doctor
+Joe taught them. There was the one-legged
+chicken fight, and one or two others, as well
+as hand wrestling, though that they had seen
+the Indians play and had practised themselves.
+They all declared that they had never in their
+lives had so much fun.</p>
+
+<p>An early start the following morning brought
+them to Hollow Cove at ten o'clock. Hollow
+Cove was a fine natural harbour. A brook
+poured down through a gulch to empty into
+the Bay, and near its mouth was an excellent
+landing-place. Not far from the brook, and
+a hundred feet back from the shore, they
+pitched their tents in the shelter of the spruce
+forest where the camp would be well protected
+from winds and storms.</p>
+
+<p>While the others set up the sheet-iron stoves
+in the three tents and broke spruce boughs
+and laid the bough beds, David, Micah, and
+Lige volunteered to cut wood.</p>
+
+<p>"There's some fine dry wood just to the
+east'ard and close to shore," suggested David,
+as they picked up their axes. "It's right
+handy."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162"></a>A dozen yards from the camp David suddenly
+stopped and exclaimed:</p>
+
+<p>"What's that now?"</p>
+
+<p>On a great sloping rock close to the shore,
+but hidden by a jutting point from the place
+where they had landed, was a recently made
+cairn of boulders capped by a large flat stone.</p>
+
+<p>"Somebody's been here!" said David as
+they hurried forward to examine the cairn.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis wonderful strange to pile stones that
+way," said Micah. "'Tis new made, too."</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe it's a cache," suggested Lige, "but
+it's a rare small un. Look and see. 'Tis a
+strange place for a cache!"</p>
+
+<p>David lifted the flat stone from the top and
+discovered beneath it a small tin can. In the
+can was a folded paper. He removed the
+paper and unfolding it discovered a message
+written in a cramped, scrawling hand.</p>
+
+<p>"Read un, Davy! Read un out loud!
+You reads writin' good!" said Lige, and David
+read:</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>"i cum and stayed 2 hour, and wood not stay no
+longer for i hed to go and did not see you comin any
+were. Then i gos to the rock were We Was the day
+We was hunting Wen We come here ferst time. Then
+i done this way. i Pases 20 Pases up To a Hackmatack
+<a name="Page_163" id="Page_163"></a>Tree. it was north. then i Pases 40 Pases west To
+a round rock, Then i Pases 60 Pases south To a wite
+berch i use cumpus. Then i climes a spruce Tree
+and hangs it and it is out of site in the Branches.
+if You plays me Crookid look out, i wont Stand for
+no Crooked work and You know what i will do to
+anybody plays me Crooked. You no Were to put
+my haf of the Swag. So i can get it Wen i go to
+get it."</p></div>
+
+<p>There was no signature.</p>
+
+<p>"That's a strange un&mdash;wonderful strange,"
+said David.</p>
+
+<p>"Stranger'n anything I ever sees," declared
+Lige.</p>
+
+<p>"Whatever is un all about?" asked Micah.</p>
+
+<p>"That's the strangeness of un," said Lige.</p>
+
+<p>"Let's show un to Doctor Joe," suggested
+David.</p>
+
+<p>But Doctor Joe, when they broke in upon
+him a moment later, was as mystified as they.</p>
+
+<p>"It looks," said he, "as though something
+had been cached and here are the directions
+for finding the cache. There's a threat in the
+letter, too, and that looks bad. It's a mystery,
+lads, we'll try to search out. It doesn't look
+right. Perhaps it's the clue to some crime."</p>
+
+<p>"How can we search un out?" asked David
+<a name="Page_164" id="Page_164"></a>excitedly. "We're not knowin' the rock, and
+there's plenty of rocks hereabouts."</p>
+
+<p>"That's true," admitted Doctor Joe. "Go
+and put the paper back as you found it, and
+we'll see what we can make out of it later."</p>
+
+<p>The whole camp was excited and every one
+followed David back to the cairn when he
+returned to restore the letter to its place in
+the can.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis something somebody's tryin' to hide,"
+suggested Peter.</p>
+
+<p>"There's no doubtin' that," said David.
+"I'm thinkin' 'tis not right whatever 'tis."</p>
+
+<p>"We'll get camp in shape and have our
+dinner and then try to solve the mystery,"
+said Doctor Joe. "It is a real mystery, for
+no one would make an ordinary cache in this
+way, and if it was an honest matter there would
+be no threat."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII"></a>CHAPTER XII</h3>
+
+<h2>THE HIDDEN CACHE</h2>
+
+
+<p>When camp was made snug and dinner
+disposed of, Doctor Joe followed the boys
+down to the cairn. A careful examination
+was made of the soil surrounding the rock
+upon which the cairn was built, and in loose
+gravel close to the shore were found the imprints
+of feet. It was evident, however, that
+rain had fallen since the tracks were made, for
+they were so nearly washed away that there
+could be no certainty whether they were made
+by moccasins or nailed boots.</p>
+
+<p>"'Twere a week ago they were here whatever,"
+observed David, rising upon his feet
+after a close scrutiny upon hands and knees.
+"I'm thinkin' we'll see no sign of un now to
+help us trail un to the rock the writin' tells
+about."</p>
+
+<p>"The ground was hard froze a week ago
+<a name="Page_166" id="Page_166"></a>just as 'tis now," said Lige. "They'd be
+leavin' no tracks on froze ground."</p>
+
+<p>"They makes the tracks that shows here
+whether the ground were froze or not," observed
+Seth.</p>
+
+<p>"The gravel were loose and dry so 'tweren't
+froze," explained Lige, "but away from the
+dry gravel 'twere all froze, and they'd make
+no tracks to show. Leastways that's how I
+thinks about un."</p>
+
+<p>"That's good logic," said Doctor Joe. "I'm
+afraid we'll have to find the rock without the
+assistance of any tracks to guide us. There will
+surely be other signs, however, and we'll look
+for them while we look for the rock."</p>
+
+<p>"Suppose now we scatters and looks up
+along the brook and along the ridge for the
+rock the pacin' were done from," suggested
+Andy. "'Tis like to be a different lookin'
+rock from most of un around here or they
+wouldn't have picked un."</p>
+
+<p>"And 'tis like to be a big un too," volunteered
+Micah. "They'd be pickin' no little rock
+for that, whatever. I'm thinkin' 'twill be
+easy to know un if we sees un."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," agreed Doctor Joe, "the rock is
+probably larger or in some other way noticeably<a name="Page_167" id="Page_167"></a>
+different from the others. It may be
+along the brook, or it may not. They were
+hunting. It may be a rock where they camped,
+or where they agreed to meet after their
+hunt, and probably where they boiled their
+kettle."</p>
+
+<p>"They weren't Bay folk, whatever," asserted
+David. "The writin' ain't like any
+of the Bay folkses writin'. None of un here
+could write so fine."</p>
+
+<p>"None of the Bay folk would be hidin'
+things that way either," said Andy. "If
+'twere anything small enough to hide in a tree
+they'd been takin' un with un and not leavin'
+un behind. If 'twere too big to carry, they'd
+just left un in a cache and come back for un
+when they gets ready and not do any writin'
+about un."</p>
+
+<p>"I think you are right, Andy," agreed Doctor
+Joe. "For the reasons you give and for still
+other reasons I feel very certain strangers to
+the Bay left the cache."</p>
+
+<p>"What were they meanin' by 'swag,' Doctor
+Joe?" asked Andy. "I never hears that
+word before. 'Tis a wonderful strange word."</p>
+
+<p>"It usually means," explained Doctor Joe,
+"something that has been stolen. The use
+<a name="Page_168" id="Page_168"></a>of that word is one of the reasons that leads
+me to conclude that it was not written by any
+of our people of the Bay. I am quite sure none
+of them knows what the word means, and
+like you I doubt if any of them ever heard it.
+There seems no doubt, indeed, that strangers
+to these parts wrote it, and as there are no
+other strangers in the Bay than the lumbermen,
+we are safe in concluding that the cairn
+was built and the note written by someone
+from the lumber camp at Grampus River."</p>
+
+<p>"'Swag' is a wonderful strange soundin' word,
+now," said David. "I never hears un before."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm thinkin' I knows what 'tis they hid
+now!" exclaimed Andy suddenly. "'Tis <i>Lem
+Horn's silver</i>! 'Tis the men hid un that shot
+Lem and stole the silver! 'Tweren't Indian
+Jake shot Lem at all! 'Twere men from the
+lumber camp! What they calls 'swag' is
+Lem's silver!"</p>
+
+<p>"That's what 'tis, now! 'Tis sure Lem
+Horn's silver!" David exploded excitedly.
+"I never would have thought of un bein'
+that! Andy's wonderful spry thinkin' things
+out, and he's mostly always right, too!"</p>
+
+<p>"And Indian Jake never stole un! He never
+stole un!" Jamie burst out joyfully. "I
+<a name="Page_169" id="Page_169"></a>were knowin' all the time he wouldn't steal un!
+Indian Jake wouldn't go shootin' folk and
+stealin' from un!"</p>
+
+<p>"It may be," said Doctor Joe. "At any
+rate it seems extremely probable the 'swag'
+as they call it is stolen property that has been
+hidden. That word and the threat together
+with the other circumstances make it quite
+certain, indeed, that whatever it is they refer
+to was stolen. That's a safe conclusion to
+begin with. We have decided that we may be
+quite sure, also, that the men that hid the cache
+so carefully were none of our own Bay people,
+but men from the lumber camp. We have
+heard of nothing else than Lem Horn's silver
+fox having been stolen in the Bay. We have
+some ground, therefore, to suppose that the
+'swag' is Lem Horn's silver fox. It will
+be a fine piece of work to search out the cache,
+and if it proves to contain Lem's silver fox,
+recover it for him. We will be doing a good
+turn to Lem and at the same time will lift
+suspicion from Indian Jake. If we find the
+cache and there is nothing in it that should not
+be there, we will not interfere with it. Now
+how shall we go about it to trace it? Let's
+hear what you chaps think is the best plan."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170"></a>"We'll separate and look for the rock they
+tells about," suggested David. "There's like
+to be some signs so we'll know un when we
+sees un. If we finds the rock 'twill not be
+hard to pace off the way they says in the
+paper."</p>
+
+<p>"And we'll be lookin' out for other signs,"
+added Peter. "'Tis likely they've been cuttin'
+wood or breakin' twigs or makin' a fire."</p>
+
+<p>"The brook ain't froze, and I'm thinkin'
+now they been walkin' there and leavin' tracks,
+if they were going' for water, and 'tis likely
+they were gettin' water to boil the kettle,"
+reasoned Seth.</p>
+
+<p>"Suppose," suggested Doctor Joe, "two of
+you follow up the brook, one on each side, and
+the rest of us will spread out on each side of
+the two following the brook, and look for the
+rock and other signs that will guide us."</p>
+
+<p>"We better make a writin' for each of us
+just like the writin' in the can with what it
+says about how to find the cache if we finds
+the rock," suggested Andy. "I for one'll
+never be rememberin' all of un without a writin'
+to look at whatever."</p>
+
+<p>"That's true, Andy," agreed Doctor Joe,
+"and none of us would."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171"></a>"Andy always thinks of things like that!"
+exclaimed David admiringly.</p>
+
+<p>"Get the paper from the can and bring it
+up to camp," directed Doctor Joe. "We'll
+make several copies of the directions. I have
+paper and pencil there in the tent."</p>
+
+<p>David lifted the flat stone from the top of
+the cairn, and removing the paper he and the
+others followed Doctor Joe to his tent, where
+Doctor Joe made nine copies of the explicit
+directions, one for himself and one for each of
+the lads.</p>
+
+<p>"You had better return this now to the can,"
+said Doctor Joe, handing the paper back to
+David, "for if it should prove after all that
+we have been mistaken, and that the cache
+does not contain Lem's silver fox or other
+stolen property, it would be wrong, and
+we would not wish, to interfere with the man
+for whom this paper was left here finding
+the cache."</p>
+
+<p>"'Twould be fair wicked to do that," agreed
+David. "I'll put un back."</p>
+
+<p>When the paper had again been returned
+to its hiding-place Doctor Joe detailed the
+boys to their different positions. David and
+Peter were to follow the brook, David on the
+<a name="Page_172" id="Page_172"></a>left side and Peter on the right side as they
+ascended. Seth Muggs, Obadiah Button, Andy
+and Jamie were to spread out at intervals
+on the left from David, and Lige Sparks, Micah
+Dunk and Doctor Joe on the right side of the
+brook from Peter. All were to ascend through
+the woods at the same time, keeping a sharp
+look-out to right and to left for any unusual
+rock or other possible signs that might lead
+to a clue.</p>
+
+<p>"Now we had better keep close enough
+together to keep in sight the man nearest us
+on the side toward the brook," directed Doctor
+Joe. "If we spread farther apart than that
+we shall be too far apart to see any rock that
+may be between us."</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, and we'll keep lookin' both ways,"
+said Andy. "That way we can't miss un."</p>
+
+<p>"It's now," Doctor Joe consulted his watch,
+"one-thirty o'clock. It's cloudy and it will
+be dark by half-past four. I'll call to Micah
+at half-past three and he will pass the word
+along to the next man and he to the next
+and so on until all have been notified. Then
+we will immediately come together and return
+to camp, that is, of course, if we have not already
+found the cache. If before that time anyone
+<a name="Page_173" id="Page_173"></a>finds what he thinks may be the rock he will
+pass the word to his neighbour, and we'll
+close in and make our search together. If it
+begins to snow, and the snow is too thick
+for us to see our next neighbour, we'll close in,
+for in that case we would miss the rock anyway.
+Do you all understand?"</p>
+
+<p>Every one understood, as the chorus of "Yes,
+sir," testified.</p>
+
+<p>"Jamie," said Doctor Joe, "you're the
+youngest one, and you haven't had much
+experience tramping through the woods. If
+you get tired, or find it hard, just come over
+to the brook and follow it down to camp. If
+you get there ahead of us you might start a
+fire in our tent stove and put the kettle over."</p>
+
+<p>"I've got plenty o' grit, sir," Jamie boasted.
+"I can stand un."</p>
+
+<p>"I think you can," agreed Doctor Joe,
+"but your legs are short. If you get tired
+don't keep going. Perhaps you had better
+take the outside place, and if you do get tired
+and fall out it won't break the line."</p>
+
+<p>Full of eagerness and excitement, the boys
+took their positions. On the left bank of the
+brook was David, next him to the left Obadiah
+Button, then Andy, beyond him Seth Muggs,
+<a name="Page_174" id="Page_174"></a>and finally Jamie. This placed Jamie on the
+extreme left flank, in accordance with Doctor
+Joe's suggestion, and the farthest from David
+and the brook.</p>
+
+<p>On the right bank of the brook were Peter
+Sparks, Doctor Joe, Lige Sparks and Micah
+Dunk in the order named, with Micah on the
+extreme right flank.</p>
+
+<p>It was a great and thrilling adventure for all
+the boys, but particularly for Jamie. There
+was a mystery to be solved, and in the attempt
+to solve it there was not merely curiosity but
+a worthy object in view. If the cache proved
+to contain Lem Horn's silver fox skin Lem and
+his whole family would be made happy.</p>
+
+<p>Jamie, in his unwavering loyalty, was anxious
+to lift from Indian Jake all suspicion of the
+crime. At present every one in the Bay, save
+only the Angus boys, believed Indian Jake
+guilty of it. Even Doctor Joe was not satisfied
+of his innocence, and, indeed, everything pointed
+to Indian Jake's guilt. Doctor Joe believed
+that the Angus boys were prejudiced in their
+loyalty to Indian Jake because of the fact
+that he had done them kindnesses.</p>
+
+<p>Jamie was sure that if they found this cache
+there would be proof that he and David and
+<a name="Page_175" id="Page_175"></a>Andy were right and everybody else wrong.
+Not only did this feature of the adventure
+appeal to him, but also the fact that he was
+for the first time in his life trailing in the
+wilderness and taking part in an undertaking
+that seemed to him one of vast importance.</p>
+
+<p>Jamie had never slept in a tent. His only
+acquaintance with the great wilderness had
+been confined to the woods surrounding The
+Jug, and always when in company with David
+or Andy or his father or Doctor Joe. Now he
+was determined to do as well as any of them,
+and, no matter how tired he became, to stick
+to the trail until Doctor Joe gave the signal
+to return to camp.</p>
+
+<p>As they ascended the slope Jamie kept a
+sharp look-out to right and left. Now and
+again Seth Muggs on his right was hidden
+by a clump of thick spruce trees or would disappear
+behind a wooded rise, presently to
+appear again through the trees.</p>
+
+<p>Jamie was happy. He was keeping pace
+with the others without the least difficulty.
+Doctor Joe had hinted that his short legs might
+not permit him to do this. He would prove
+that he was as able as Seth Muggs or any of
+them!</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176"></a>Nothing happened for nearly an hour, and
+Jamie was beginning to think that the search
+was to end in disappointment, when suddenly
+his heart gave a leap of joy. Far to the left
+and just visible through the trees rose the
+outlines of a great grey rock.</p>
+
+<p>"That's the rock!" exclaimed Jamie.
+"That's sure he! I'll look at un for signs,
+and then if there's any signs to be seen about
+un I'll call Seth!"</p>
+
+<p>Jamie ran through the trees and brush to
+the rock, which proved, indeed, to be a landmark.
+It stood alone, and was twice as high
+as Jamie's head.</p>
+
+<p>Here he was treated to another thrill. On
+the west side of the rock was the charred wood
+of a recent camp fire. A tent had been pitched
+near at hand, as was evidenced by the still
+unwithered boughs that had formed a bed,
+and discarded tent pegs, and there were many
+axe cuttings.</p>
+
+<p>"'Twere white men and not Injuns that
+camped here," reasoned Jamie. "All the
+Injun fires I ever heard tell about were made
+smaller than this un. And these folk were
+pilin' up stones on the side. No Injuns or
+Bay folk does that, whatever!"</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177"></a>Jamie continued to investigate.</p>
+
+<p>"'Twere not Bay folk did the axe cuttin'
+either," he decided. "All the Bay folk and
+Injuns uses small axes when they travels, and
+this cuttin' were done with big uns!"</p>
+
+<p>Looking about the rock he found other
+evidences that the campers had been strangers
+to the country. There was a piece of a Halifax
+newspaper, an empty bottle, and a small tin
+can containing matches. The box of matches
+he put into his pocket. They had been lost
+or overlooked, and no hunter of the Bay or
+Indian would ever have been guilty of such
+carelessness. Of this Jamie had no question.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis sure the rock the writin' tells about,"
+he commented.</p>
+
+<p>Jamie looked a little farther, and then
+suddenly realizing that he should not wait
+too long before calling, shouted lustily:</p>
+
+<p>"Seth, I finds un! Seth! Seth! I finds
+the rock!"</p>
+
+<p>He waited a moment for Seth's answering
+call, but there was no response. A much
+longer time had elapsed during Jamie's examination
+of the rock and the surroundings than he
+realized, and in the meantime Seth and the
+others had passed on, and Seth was now in
+<a name="Page_178" id="Page_178"></a>a deeply wooded gully where Jamie's shouts
+failed to reach him.</p>
+
+<p>"Seth! Seth! I finds un! I finds the
+place!" he shouted again, but still there was
+no response from Seth.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm thinkin' now Seth has gone too far to
+hear," said Jamie to himself. "'Twould be
+fine to find Lem's silver all alone and take un
+back to camp. I'll just do what the writin'
+says. I'll pace up the places. I can do un all
+by myself, and 'twill be a fine surprise to un
+all to take the silver back to camp."</p>
+
+<p>Jamie had no doubt that the mysterious cache
+contained the stolen fox pelt. No thought of
+disappointment in this or of danger to himself
+entered his head. His whole mind was
+centred upon one point. He would be the hero
+of the Bay if, quite alone, he succeeded in
+recovering Lem's property and at the same
+time in clearing Indian Jake of suspicion.</p>
+
+<p>Without further delay he drew from his
+pocket the carefully folded copy of directions
+that Doctor Joe had given him and sat down
+to study it.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII</h3>
+
+<h2>SURPRISED AND CAPTURED</h2>
+
+
+<p>"Twenty paces to a hackmatack tree,
+north," read Jamie. He drew from his
+pocket the little compass Doctor Joe had given
+him, and took the direction.</p>
+
+<p>"That's the way she goes, the way the
+needle points," he said to himself. "I'll pace
+un off. North is the way she goes first."</p>
+
+<p>But an obstacle presented itself. The
+northern face of the rock was irregular, and
+from end to end fully thirty feet in length.
+From what point of the rock was the northerly
+line to begin? Where should he begin to pace?
+Finally he selected a middle point as the most
+probable.</p>
+
+<p>"'Twill be from here," he decided. "They'd
+never be startin' the line from anywheres but
+the middle."</p>
+
+<p>Holding the compass in his hand that he
+<a name="Page_180" id="Page_180"></a>might make no mistake, and trembling with
+the excitement of one about to make a great
+discovery, he paced to the northward, stretching
+his short legs to the longest possible stride,
+until he counted twenty paces. It brought
+him not to a hackmatack tree, but to the middle
+of several spruce trees. He returned to the
+rock and tried again. This time he was led to
+a tangle of brush to the left of the spruce trees
+into which his former effort had taken him.
+He was vastly puzzled.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis something I does wrong," he mused.
+"Doctor Joe were sayin' the compass points
+right, and she is right. 'Tis wonderful strange
+though."</p>
+
+<p>He experimented again and discovered that
+if he did not hold the compass perfectly level
+the needle did not swing properly. In his
+excitement he had doubtless tipped the compass,
+and with the needle thus bound he had been
+led astray.</p>
+
+<p>He climbed to the top of the rock, and placing
+his compass in a level position, permitted the
+needle to swing to a stationary position. He
+extracted a match from the tin box in his pocket
+and laid it upon the compass dial exactly
+parallel with the needle. Lying on his face,
+<a name="Page_181" id="Page_181"></a>he squinted his eye along the match to a distant
+tree. Rising, he observed the tree that he might
+make no mistake, and returning to the face of
+the rock strode twenty of his best paces in the
+direction of the tree. Again he was disappointed.
+There was no hackmatack tree
+at the end of his line.</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe he was a big man that does the
+pacin' and takes longer paces," he said to
+himself. "I'll go a bit farther."</p>
+
+<p>He looked directly ahead, but saw no hackmatack
+within a reasonable extension of his
+twenty paces to account for the longer strides
+the original pacer may have taken. Much
+discouraged, he was about to return again
+to the rock when suddenly his eye fell upon
+a small and scarcely noticeable hackmatack
+six paces to the right of his north line and
+a little beyond him.</p>
+
+<p>"That must be he, now!" he exclaimed.
+"'Tis the only hackmatack I sees hereabouts.
+'Tis <i>sure</i> he! I'll pace un back to the rock!
+If the tree's nuth'ard from the rock, the rock'll
+be south'ard from the tree. I'll try pacin'
+that way."</p>
+
+<p>With his compass Jamie sighted from the
+tree to the rock, and to his satisfaction the
+<a name="Page_182" id="Page_182"></a>rock, lying due south, fell within his line of
+sight, but at the extreme easterly end of its
+northerly face instead of at the centre, the point
+from which he had run his original line. He
+now paced the distance, which proved to be
+a little farther than twenty of Jamie's longest
+strides, which he accounted for again by
+reasoning that a man could take longer steps
+than he could stretch with his short legs.</p>
+
+<p>Then for the first time Jamie observed two
+stones, one on top of the other, at the foot
+of the rock and at the very place to which his
+compass had directed him. He lifted the stones
+and an examination proved that they had not
+long since been placed in the position in which
+he found them. Both had marks of earth upon
+them on the lower side, but the stone which
+was below rested upon the carpet of caribou
+moss which covered the ground and prevented
+it from coming in contact with the earth.
+It could not, therefore, have been stained
+with soil in the place where Jamie now
+found it.</p>
+
+<p>"They was put there as a pilot mark! They
+shows the true mark of the place to pace from,"
+he soliloquized, replacing them in the position
+in which he had found them. "I'll take un
+<a name="Page_183" id="Page_183"></a>as a pilot, whatever, and see how she comes
+out on the next track."</p>
+
+<p>He returned to the little hackmatack tree
+and again consulted the paper.</p>
+
+<p>"Forty paces west to a round rock," he read,
+observing, "that won't be so hard now as
+findin' the hackmatack tree. 'Twill be easier
+to see, whatever."</p>
+
+<p>Methodically he gathered some stones and
+erected a small pedestal upon which to rest
+his compass while he ran his westerly line.
+Loose stones of proper size were hard to find.
+The smaller ones were frozen fast to the ground,
+and the larger ones were too heavy for him
+to move. But presently he collected a sufficient
+number of small stones to form a pedestal
+a foot and a half high.</p>
+
+<p>Upon the top of this he levelled his compass,
+and turned it until the needle, swinging freely,
+rested upon the north point on the dial. Then,
+as before, he placed a match upon the face of
+the compass to form a line from the "E"
+to the "W" on the dial. Crouching down
+upon the ground Jamie sighted, as before, to
+a distant tree, but as he did so be became
+suddenly aware that the light was fading. He
+had been much longer than he had realized,
+<a name="Page_184" id="Page_184"></a>consuming a great deal of time in examining
+the signs around the big rock and in taking his
+distances from the rock.</p>
+
+<p>"This line is sure right the first time," he
+said. "'Twill not take me much longer, and
+I finds the round rock now. If I finds un I'll
+be sure I'm goin' the right way, and I'll be
+right handy to the cache."</p>
+
+<p>Thirty-nine of Jamie's paces brought him to
+the tree upon which he had taken sight, and
+looking a little way beyond he saw, to his
+great joy, a round rock.</p>
+
+<p>Jamie was trembling with excitement as he
+ran eagerly to the rock. This was the second
+direction laid down upon the paper! There
+could be no doubt that he was right! Everything
+answered the description! He would
+surely find the cache now! What a surprise
+it would be to Doctor Joe and the boys if he
+came walking into camp triumphantly bearing
+Lem Horn's silver fox skin.</p>
+
+<p>"Sixty paces south," he next read from his
+directions.</p>
+
+<p>He placed his compass upon the top of the
+round rock, which rose perhaps three feet
+above the ground, and repeated his former
+method, again sighting to a convenient tree.
+<a name="Page_185" id="Page_185"></a>Twilight was perceptibly thickening. At this
+season darkness falls early in Labrador, and
+now, because of a heavily clouded sky, it was
+following twilight quickly.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll keep at un till I finds the cache. I'll
+find un before I goes back to camp whatever,"
+he determined. "'Twill be easy enough gettin'
+to camp even if 'tis dark before I gets there.
+The brook's handy by, and I'll just go to un and
+follow un down to camp. I hope they'll not
+be worryin' about me, but if they does 'twill
+not be for long. I'll soon be there now."</p>
+
+<p>The distance from the round rock to the
+tree upon which he had sighted proved to be
+but thirty of his short paces. Here he was
+compelled to pile stones again upon which
+to build a resting-place for his compass before
+taking another sight. Small stones such as
+he could lift were not easily found, and when
+at length he was prepared to take the sight
+the gloom had grown so thick that he had
+difficulty in locating a tree that he judged was
+sufficiently far away to cover the remaining
+distance. Thirty more paces, however, brought
+him to the tree, and to his unbounded joy a
+lone white birch stood just beyond.</p>
+
+<p>Within three paces of the birch the
+<a name="Page_186" id="Page_186"></a>mysterious cache was hidden. Here, however,
+the directions failed to be sufficiently explicit.
+Either through oversight or purposely the
+bearings from the birch were omitted.</p>
+
+<p>Jamie paced first to one tree and then to
+another; any of several trees might be the
+correct one. They were all thickly branched
+spruce trees capable of concealing the coveted
+cache. Jamie was puzzled, and every moment
+it was growing darker. He looked up into
+the branches of one and then another, hoping
+to see a bag suspended from a limb, but if a
+bag were there it blended so completely with
+the foliage that even its outlines were not
+revealed.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll have to climb un all," said Jamie
+finally, "and I'll have to be spry about un
+too or 'twill be fair dark before I gets to climb
+the last of un."</p>
+
+<p>For his first effort he chose a tree three paces
+beyond the birch and in a line with the rock.
+He had no difficulty in shinning up the trunk
+until he reached a lower limb, and then he
+quite easily drew himself up.</p>
+
+<p>Climbing through the thick screen of branches
+he looked eagerly for the coveted hidden
+mystery, not stopping until he was well into
+<a name="Page_187" id="Page_187"></a>the tree top and had made quite certain that
+no cache was hidden there. Then, as he
+looked up toward the sky, he felt a snowflake
+on his face.</p>
+
+<p>"Snowin'!" he exclaimed. "I'll have to
+be hurryin' now. If it snows hard Doctor
+Joe sure will be gettin' worried about me."</p>
+
+<p>At that moment Jamie heard the breaking
+of a twig. He paused and listened. Presently
+he heard footsteps, and a moment later a
+man's voice. Through the gathering darkness
+appeared the figures of two men, and even at
+that distance Jamie knew they were not Bay
+folk. They travelled less silently, and the
+tread of heavy boots is quite unlike that of
+moccasined feet.</p>
+
+<p>Jamie crouched close to the tree trunk. He
+scarcely breathed. The approaching figures
+came directly toward the white birch.</p>
+
+<p>"It's lucky we saw them fellers first," said
+a gruff voice. "They'd sure suspicioned somethin'
+if they'd got a glim on us. They never
+seen us comin' over, and they'll never find
+our boat where we hid her."</p>
+
+<p>"If they found that there writin' you went
+and left in the tin can you were tellin' about,
+they've like as not follered the directions you
+<a name="Page_188" id="Page_188"></a>give and found the swag," growled the other.
+"That won't be very lucky for us."</p>
+
+<p>"They'd never find her," assured the first
+speaker. "They'd have to find the rock first,
+and she's a good two mile from shore. They'd
+never find her in a dog's age. Here we be.
+Here's the white birch."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, where's the tree you went and hid
+the stuff in?"</p>
+
+<p>"Here she is." The man indicated a tree
+next to that in which Jamie was perched.
+"Here, take my leg and gimme a boost. I'll
+go up and get it."</p>
+
+<p>Jamie scarcely dared breathe. He could
+see one of the men make a stirrup of his hands,
+and the other man step into it and swing into
+the tree. Up he climbed to a point directly
+opposite Jamie, and so near Jamie could hear
+him breathe.</p>
+
+<p>"Got her, Bill?" asked the man below.</p>
+
+<p>"You bet I got her! She's here all right,
+just like I said she'd be," answered the man
+in the tree.</p>
+
+<p>Jamie's heart sank. After all his hopes and
+efforts he became suddenly aware that he
+could not return to camp triumphantly bearing
+Lem Horn's silver fox pelt as he had pictured
+<a name="Page_189" id="Page_189"></a>himself doing. Lem would never get the pelt
+again. Every one in the Bay would go on
+believing that Indian Jake had shot Lem and
+stolen the pelt. And he had been so near
+setting all this right!</p>
+
+<p>It never entered his head that the cache could
+contain anything else than the pelt. Because
+he wished Indian Jake to be innocent of the
+crime, he had come to believe that he <i>was</i>
+innocent, even though Indian Jake himself
+had not denied having the stolen property in
+his possession, and everybody, save only himself
+and David and Andy, believed Indian
+Jake had it.</p>
+
+<p>"Here she be safe and sound and as good
+as ever," said the man as he dropped from the
+lower limb of the tree to the ground. "Let's
+open her up and have a drink, Hank."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll go you, Bill. My throat feels as long
+as a camel's and as dry as a snake's back."</p>
+
+<p>Jamie could see the man called Bill stooping
+over the small bag to untie it, and presently
+draw forth a bottle.</p>
+
+<p>"Here she be, and the other three bottles
+too," said Bill. "You open her up, Hank,
+while I see if the roll is there and the other
+stuff."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190"></a>Bill ran his arm in the bag.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, it's all right," he assured. "I guess
+the Captain didn't miss the money before the
+ship sailed, and there ain't any way of his
+gettin' word in to the boss about it now before
+next spring. We're safe enough to take it
+back and make our divvy. There won't be
+any search made for it now."</p>
+
+<p>"Naw, we're safe enough now." Hank
+tipped the bottle to his lips, and handed it to
+Bill. "The boss ain't missed his liquor neither,
+and there won't be any to miss pretty soon
+the way you're pulin' at it."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know's I took any more'n you did,"
+said Bill petulantly, corking the bottle and
+returning it to the bag. "It was a good move
+to play safe anyhow and hide the swag until
+we made sure the boss wouldn't go searching
+through our stuff for it. I don't know's he'd
+suspicion us any more'n the rest of the crew,
+but he'd search everybody's stuff if the Captain
+had give him a tip."</p>
+
+<p>"You bet he would!" agreed Hank. "We
+just played in luck right through. They won't
+blame us for that other job, will they? They
+ain't likely to go makin' a search for that, be
+they?"</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191"></a>"Naw!" said Bill. "That other feller,
+whatever his name is, has got 'em on his trail
+for that. We ain't in it. They'll never
+suspicion us for that. We made a slick job
+of that."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, let's beat it back," said Hank. "It's
+snowin' and it's goin' to snow hard. The
+sooner we gets back to camp the better we'll
+be off."</p>
+
+<p>Bill swung the bag over his shoulder, when
+suddenly he stopped and exclaimed:</p>
+
+<p>"What's that?"</p>
+
+<p>Jimmy had sneezed, and again he sneezed.</p>
+
+<p>"Some sneak in that there tree!" and Bill
+with an oath dropped his bag and seized his
+rifle, which he had leaned against the tree
+in which Jimmy was perched. "I'll put a
+bullet up there! That'll settle that feller,
+whoever he is!"</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV</h3>
+
+<h2>THE TWO DESPERADOS</h2>
+
+
+<p>"Don't shoot, sir! It's just me!" Jamie
+piped in terror from the tree.</p>
+
+<p>"It's only a kid!" Bill swore an oath of
+disgust and lowered his rifle. "You git down
+out'n that tree! Git down quicker'n lightnin',
+too!"</p>
+
+<p>"I'm comin', sir!" came Jamie's frightened
+voice from the tree-top.</p>
+
+<p>Jamie lost no time in descending from his
+perch and in a moment stood trembling before
+his captors. It was quite dark now and snowing
+hard, and to the frightened little lad the two
+big lumbermen loomed up like giants.</p>
+
+<p>"What you doin' here?" demanded Bill
+with an oath as he seized Jamie's arm with a
+grip that made the lad wince.</p>
+
+<p>"I were&mdash;I were huntin' for the cache,"
+confessed Jamie.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193"></a>"Goin' to steal our cache, was ye? Well,
+we'll teach you to leave other folkses things
+be!" The man gave Jamie a savage shake.
+"Tryin' to steal our cache, eh? Who set you
+on to it? That's what I want to know!
+Who set you on to stealin' it, now?"</p>
+
+<p>"I weren't goin' to steal un, sir," chattered
+Jamie, horrified at the implication that he was
+a thief.</p>
+
+<p>"What were you huntin' the cache for, then?
+Don't lie, you little rat, or I'll twist your neck
+off!"</p>
+
+<p>The fellow seemed quite capable of executing
+the threat literally, as he again shook Jamie
+savagely.</p>
+
+<p>"I&mdash;aint'&mdash;lyin'&mdash;about&mdash;un, sir!" pleaded
+Jamie between the shakes. "I were&mdash;just&mdash;goin'&mdash;to&mdash;look&mdash;at
+un, and&mdash;if&mdash;'tweren't&mdash;Lem
+Horn's silver fox&mdash;I weren't&mdash;goin' to
+touch un!"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, 'tain't Lem Horn's silver fox. It's
+things of our'n! Do you hear that? <i>'Tain't</i>
+Lem Horn's silver, it's our'n what's in that
+there bag! You leave our things be! Do
+you hear what I'm sayin'? You and your
+gang keep away from our cache, and don't
+go foolin' with anything you don't know any<a name="Page_194" id="Page_194"></a>thing
+about! Do you hear?" The man gave
+Jamie another shake.</p>
+
+<p>"I&mdash;I didn't know! We&mdash;we just suspicioned
+'twere Lem's silver, and I were wantin'
+to take un back to he," explained Jamie.</p>
+
+<p>"You heard what I said? 'Tain't Lem
+Horn's silver! You hear that, don't you?"</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, sir, I saw what you was takin' out
+of the bag, and 'tweren't Lem Horn's silver.
+'Twere something to drink out of a bottle.
+I sees you drinkin' it."</p>
+
+<p>"Let the kid go, Bill," laughed Hank,
+who until now had kept silent.</p>
+
+<p>"We were all thinkin' 'twere Lem's silver.
+I'll tell un 'twere not the silver but somethin'
+else that you takes from the Captain that you
+were hidin' in the cache," said Jamie hopefully.</p>
+
+<p>"You goin' to tell that! You heard what
+we said, and you goin' to blab it?" the man
+roared in a rage.</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, sir, I'll just tell the others so's they'll
+not be thinkin' 'tis Lem's silver," said Jamie
+innocently.</p>
+
+<p>"The others? Who's 'the others'?" demanded
+Bill.</p>
+
+<p>"Doctor Joe and the other scouts," Jamie
+explained.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195"></a>"'Doctor Joe and the other scouts,'" quoted
+the big lumberman. "Who's this here Doctor
+Joe? And who's the other scouts?"</p>
+
+<p>"He's Doctor Joe! Everybody knows
+Doctor Joe!" explained Jamie, quite astonished
+that any one should ask who Doctor Joe might
+be. "The scouts be the other lads of the
+Bay, sir."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, this here Doctor Joe, whoever he is,
+and these here other scouts, whoever they
+be, better keep out'n our business and mind
+their own," roared the man. "I suppose
+they're this here bunch what's campin' down
+by the brook and been runnin' all over the
+country to-day?"</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, sir, we're all campin' down handy
+to the brook, and we've all been lookin' for
+the cache, but I'm the only one that finds
+the rock," admitted Jamie.</p>
+
+<p>"You ain't camped down there now!"
+The man swore a mighty and strange oath
+that made Jamie tremble. "You was camped
+there, but <i>now</i> you ain't! You're goin' with
+us, <i>you</i> be! Hear that?"</p>
+
+<p>"Aw, let the kid go!" broke in Hank,
+impatiently. "We better be gettin' a jog on
+us too. Leave the kid be, and come on. He's
+<a name="Page_196" id="Page_196"></a>just a kid and he can't kick up any trouble.
+Leave him be, and let's get out of here."</p>
+
+<p>"Not me!" The man gave Jamie's arm a
+painful twist. "I ain't goin' to leave this here
+kid to go back and blab to that there Doctor
+Joe and the hull country. He heard our
+talk, and if it gets to the boss you know what
+that means. I ain't takin' any chances on
+him, and I'm half of this."</p>
+
+<p>"We'll be gettin' in bigger trouble if we
+takes him along. We'll have the hull country
+huntin' us," Hank protested.</p>
+
+<p>"You heard me! I ain't goin' to take
+chances on his blabbin'! He goes along, and
+I'll fix him so's he won't blab and nobody'll
+get our trail if they do hunt us. The snow'll
+hide it," insisted Bill.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, let's get a move on then," said
+Hank. "The wind's risin' and it's goin' to
+kick up a sea. I don't want to be caught out
+on the Bay again in a sea like we had that
+other time. The snow's goin' to be thick
+too, and we'll lose our bearings."</p>
+
+<p>"Go on, then. I'll foller with the kid,"
+said Bill, still holding Jamie's aching arm.</p>
+
+<p>"Better let the kid go," said Hank, swinging
+a rifle over his left shoulder and with an axe
+<a name="Page_197" id="Page_197"></a>in his right hand striding away through the
+darkness and thickly falling snow.</p>
+
+<p>"Come along you!" and Jamie's captor,
+gripping Jamie's arm in one hand and with a
+rifle in the other, followed in the trail of the
+man Hank, dragging Jamie almost too fast
+for his legs to carry him.</p>
+
+<p>On and on they went through the darkness.
+Now and again Jamie fell over stumps or other
+obstructions, and each time the man, with a
+curse, jerked him to his feet.</p>
+
+<p>Snow was falling heavily and the wind was
+rising. Once they crossed a frozen marsh
+where the snow swirled around them in
+clouds. Then they were again among the
+forest trees, forging ahead in silence save for
+an occasional curse by the man who held
+Jamie in his merciless and relentless grip.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV"></a>CHAPTER XV</h3>
+
+<h2>MISSING!</h2>
+
+
+<p>Seth Muggs, intent upon keeping pace
+with Andy on his right, and not permitting
+him to get out of sight, quite neglected
+to be equally cautious as to Jamie on his left.
+In this Seth was in no wise neglectful. The
+responsibility in each case, in order to keep
+the line from breaking, was to keep the neighbour
+nearer the brook in view. In this Jamie
+alone had failed.</p>
+
+<p>Jamie had, indeed, been out of line for a
+considerable time before Seth became aware
+of the fact. Even then he felt no concern.
+Doctor Joe had instructed Jamie to return
+to camp if he became weary, and when he was
+missed had no doubt he had taken advantage
+of the suggestion.</p>
+
+<p>Nevertheless, when Doctor Joe passed the
+word along the line to reassemble, Seth gave
+several lusty shouts for Jamie. When, after
+<a name="Page_199" id="Page_199"></a>a reasonable time, he received no reply, he was
+satisfied Jamie was snug in camp with the kettle
+boiling for tea, and he turned down to join the
+others at the brook.</p>
+
+<p>"It's a little later than I thought," said
+Doctor Joe as they came together, "but we'll
+have plenty of time to reach camp before dark.
+Now let's count noses."</p>
+
+<p>"Where's Jamie?" asked David. "We're
+all here but Jamie."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm thinkin' he gets tired and goes back
+to camp like Doctor Joe were sayin' for he to
+do," suggested Seth. "I missed he a while
+back."</p>
+
+<p>"How long has it been since you saw him
+last, Seth?" asked Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm not rightly knowin', but a half-hour
+whatever," said Seth, "and I'm thinkin' 'twere
+a bit longer."</p>
+
+<p>"He has probably gone back to camp, then,"
+agreed Doctor Joe. "It was a pretty hard
+tramp for such a little fellow. It is quite
+natural that he did not like to admit to you that
+he could not keep up with us, and he just
+slipped quietly away and returned to camp
+and said nothing about it. He couldn't well
+get lost with the brook so near to guide him."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200"></a>"Jamie'd never be gettin' lost whatever,"
+asserted Andy. "He's wonderful good at
+findin' his way about."</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis goin' to snow, and 'twill be dark
+early," suggested David, as the little party
+turned down the brook to retrace their steps
+to camp. "There's a bend in the brook here;
+let's cut across un and save time. If she
+sets in to snow to-night 'tis like to keep un
+up all day to-morrow, and we'd better get
+back as quick as we can to cut plenty of wood
+and have un on hand."</p>
+
+<p>"Very well," agreed Doctor Joe. "You go
+ahead and guide us, David."</p>
+
+<p>"'Twill be fine and cosy just bidin' in camp
+and studyin' up the things in the book," said
+Obadiah as they followed David in a short
+cut toward camp. "We'll be havin' a fine
+time even if it does snow too hard to go about."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," agreed Doctor Joe, "we can do that
+and learn a great many things about scouting."</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly David held up his hand for silence,
+and stooping peered through the trees ahead.
+The others followed his gaze, and there, not
+above fifty yards away and looking curiously
+at them, stood a caribou.</p>
+
+<p>Only David and Doctor Joe had brought
+<a name="Page_201" id="Page_201"></a>rifles. Almost instantly David's rifle rang out,
+and the caribou turned and disappeared.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm sure I hit he!" exclaimed David
+running in the direction the caribou had taken.
+"I couldn't miss he so close, and a fair shot!"</p>
+
+<p>"You hit he!" exclaimed Andy who had
+dashed ahead. "You hit he, Davy! Here's
+the mark of blood!"</p>
+
+<p>A trail of blood left no doubt that the caribou
+had been hard hit, but it was followed for
+nearly a mile before they came upon the
+prostrate animal.</p>
+
+<p>"Now we'll have plenty of fresh deer's
+meat!" burst out Obadiah enthusiastically.
+"We'll have meat for supper, and I'm wonderful
+hungry for un!"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," agreed Doctor Joe, "we had better
+dress it at once. There are enough of us to
+carry all the meat back with us to camp, and
+that will save making a return trip."</p>
+
+<p>"'Twill be a fine surprise for Jamie when
+we comes back with deer's meat," said Andy
+enthusiastically.</p>
+
+<p>"'Twill make us a bit late and he'll be
+thinkin' we finds the cache," suggested David.
+"I hopes he won't be comin' up the brook
+again to look for us."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202"></a>"I hardly think he'll do that," said Doctor
+Joe, "but to be sure he does not some of you
+had better go to the brook and leave a sign
+to tell him which way we've gone. David and
+I will skin and dress the caribou."</p>
+
+<p>"Come along, Seth," Andy volunteered.
+"We'll be goin' over to make the sign."</p>
+
+<p>"Come back here as soon as you've done it,"
+directed Doctor Joe. "We'll need your help
+in carrying the meat to camp."</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, sir, we'll be comin' right back," agreed
+Andy as he and Seth hurried away.</p>
+
+<p>Close to the brook, in a place where it could
+not fail to be seen, the lads set a pole at an
+angle of forty-five degrees, pointing in the
+direction in which the caribou had been killed.
+Against the pole and about a third of the
+distance from its lower end an upright stick
+was placed. This was an Indian sign familiar
+to all the hunters and wilderness folk, indicating
+that the party had gone in the direction in
+which the pole sloped, the upright stick a
+little way from the butt further indicating
+that the distance was not far.</p>
+
+<p>"Jamie'll know what that means, and if
+he wearies of bidin' alone in camp and comes
+to find us he'll not be missin' us now whatever,"<a name="Page_203" id="Page_203"></a>
+said Andy with satisfaction, as he and
+Seth turned back.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm goin' to blaze the trail over, and he
+won't be like to miss un, then," suggested Seth,
+taking the axe.</p>
+
+<p>When Andy and Seth rejoined the others
+Doctor Joe and David had nearly finished
+skinning the caribou, and in due time they
+had it ready to cut up. The head was severed
+with as little of the neck meat as possible
+that there might be no unnecessary waste,
+for they could not carry the head with them.
+Then the tongue was removed, for this was
+considered a titbit.</p>
+
+<p>The question of how to carry the meat to
+camp was finally settled by making two litters
+with poles. The carcass was now cut into two
+nearly equal parts, one of which was placed
+on each litter. Doctor Joe took the forward
+end of one of the litters, and David the forward
+end of the other. With two boys carrying the
+rear end of each litter, and the other lads the
+skin, heart, liver and tongue, and the two
+rifles and the axe, they at length set out for
+camp.</p>
+
+<p>Night was falling and the first flakes of the
+coming snow-storm were felt upon their faces
+<a name="Page_204" id="Page_204"></a>when finally the little white tents came in
+view.</p>
+
+<p>"There's no light," remarked David, who
+was in advance. "Jamie's savin' candles.
+I'm hopin' now he has the kettle boilin'."</p>
+
+<p>"He'll have un boilin'," assured Andy, who
+was one of the two boys at the rear of David's
+litter. "He'll be proud to have un boilin'
+and supper started."</p>
+
+<p>"There's no smoke!" exclaimed David
+apprehensively as they came closer. "Jamie,
+b'y!" he shouted. "Where is you? Come
+out and see what we're gettin'!"</p>
+
+<p>But no Jamie came, and there was no answering
+call. The stretchers were hastily placed
+on the ground, and every tent searched for
+Jamie.</p>
+
+<p>"Jamie's never been comin' back since we
+leaves!" David declared. "Whatever has
+been happenin' to he?"</p>
+
+<p>"I can't understand it," said Doctor Joe.
+"He could not possibly have been lost. Andy,
+you and Micah run down and look at the boats
+and see if he has been there."</p>
+
+<p>Andy and Micah ran excitedly to the boats
+to report a few moments later that there were
+no indications of Jamie's return.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205"></a>"David, you and I shall have to go and look
+for him," said Doctor Joe quietly. "Andy,
+you and the other lads build a fire outside as
+a guide. Get your supper, and don't worry
+until we return."</p>
+
+<p>"What do you think's been happenin' to
+Jamie?" asked Andy anxiously.</p>
+
+<p>"We took a short cut and did not follow the
+brook where it makes a wide bend," suggested
+Doctor Joe. "He may be waiting for us
+along the brook at that point."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, I hopes you'll find he there!" said
+Andy fervently.</p>
+
+<p>"Get your rifle and plenty of cartridges,
+David," directed Doctor Joe. "I'll carry mine
+also. When we get up the trail we'll shoot
+to let Jamie know we're looking for him."</p>
+
+<p>Each with a rifle on his shoulder, Doctor
+Joe in the lead and David following close
+behind, the two turned away into the now
+thickly falling snow and darkness.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XVI" id="CHAPTER_XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI</h3>
+
+<h2>BOUND AND HELPLESS</h2>
+
+
+<p>"See here," said the man in front, stopping
+and turning about after what had seemed
+hours to the exhausted and bruised Jamie,
+"I for one ain't goin' to try to cross the Bay
+to-night in this here snow. It's thicker'n mud,
+and there's a sea runnin' I won't take chances
+with, not while I'm sober. We may's well
+bunk."</p>
+
+<p>"Guess you're right, pardner, we better
+bunk. But pull farther away to the west'ard
+before we put on a fire," agreed Jamie's captor
+with evident relief. "That bunch'll be out
+huntin' this here kid, and they may run on
+to us if we camp too close to 'em."</p>
+
+<p>"We're a good two mile from 'em now.
+They'll never run on to us," argued the other.</p>
+
+<p>"Go on a piece farther," insisted the man
+called Bill, who was gripping Jamie's arm so
+hard that it ached.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207"></a>"Let the kid go! What's the use of draggin'
+him along? He'll just be in our way, and
+we've got troubles enough of our own," suggested
+the other.</p>
+
+<p>"He ain't goin' back and have a chance to
+give us away to that bunch, not if I knows it.
+I've about made up my mind to croak him.
+He knows too much. Go on and find a place
+to bunk. I'm follerin'."</p>
+
+<p>"You won't croak anybody while I'm
+hangin' around! I'm tellin' you I've got
+troubles enough on my hands already without
+chasin' a noose. I'm goin' to save my neck
+anyhow, and I ain't goin' to be mixed up in
+any croakin'," muttered the one called Hank,
+as he turned and plunged forward again through
+the darkness.</p>
+
+<p>What "croaking" meant Jamie did not in
+the least know, but he suspected that it referred
+to something not in the least pleasant for
+himself. He was too tired, however, to think
+or care a great deal as he was dragged on,
+stumbling in the darkness over fallen logs,
+and bumping into trees.</p>
+
+<p>It seemed an interminable time to Jamie
+before the man ahead again stopped, and said
+decisively:</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208"></a>"We'll camp here. We've gone far enough,
+and I ain't goin' another rod. We're a good
+five mile from them fellers you're afraid of."</p>
+
+<p>"All right, I'm satisfied. You've got the
+axe, go ahead and make a cover," said Bill.
+"Kid, you come with me and help break
+branches for the bed. Don't you loaf neither.
+Do you hear me?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir," answered Jamie timidly.</p>
+
+<p>It was a relief to stop walking and to feel
+the man relax the relentless grip upon his arm,
+and Jamie, meekly enough, began breaking
+boughs with the man always within striking
+distance, as though afraid that he might run
+away and make his escape, though Jamie was
+quite too tired for that.</p>
+
+<p>The man with the axe cut a stiff pole and
+trimmed it. Then he lopped off the lower
+branches of two spruce trees that stood a
+convenient distance apart, and laid the pole
+on a supporting limb of each tree, about four
+feet from the ground. This was to form the
+ridge of a lean-to shelter. Poles were now
+cut and formed into a sloping roof by resting
+one end upon the ridge pole, the other upon
+the ground, and the poles covered with a thick
+thatch of branches to exclude the snow.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209"></a>When this was completed a quantity of dry
+wood was cut, and in front of the lean-to a
+fire was lighted.</p>
+
+<p>While the man with the axe was engaged
+in thatching the roof and lighting the fire
+and gathering wood, the other turned his
+attention to the preparation of the bed.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't you try to break away, now!" he
+growled at Jamie. "I'll shoot you like I
+would a rat if you do. Just stand there and
+hand me them branches, and shake the snow
+off'n 'em first, too."</p>
+
+<p>Running was the last thing that Jamie
+contemplated doing, even though there had
+been no danger of the man executing his threat.
+He was so tired he could scarcely stand upon
+his feet, and he had eaten nothing since the
+hurried meal at midday.</p>
+
+<p>At length the bed was laid, and the men sat
+down within the shelter of the lean-to, and
+Bill ordered:</p>
+
+<p>"Git down here, you kid, and set still too.
+Don't you try to leave here. You know what's
+comin' to you if you do."</p>
+
+<p>As Jamie meekly and thankfully complied,
+Bill ran his arm into the bag that had been
+cached in the tree, and which had been the
+<a name="Page_210" id="Page_210"></a>cause of all of Jamie's trouble, and drawing
+forth a bottle removed the cork and took a
+long pull from its contents. Making a face as
+though it did not taste good, he handed it
+over to Hank, remarking:</p>
+
+<p>"Have a nip, Hank. It'll warm you up and
+make you feel good. I don't like this cruisin'
+in the dark."</p>
+
+<p>Hank accepted the bottle and after drinking
+from it returned it to the bag. Then each
+drew a pipe and a plug of black tobacco from
+his pocket, and cutting some of the tobacco
+with the knife rolled it between the palms of
+his hands, stuffed it into his pipe and lighted
+it with a brand from the fire. For several
+minutes they sat and smoked in silence.</p>
+
+<p>In the meantime Jamie sat timidly upon
+the boughs next the man Bill. As the fire
+blazed, the chill of the storm and night was
+driven out, and a cozy, comfortable warmth
+filled the lean-to. Jamie's eyes became heavy,
+and in spite of his unhappy position he
+dozed.</p>
+
+<p>"See here," said the man, "you may's well
+sleep, but I ain't goin' to take any chances
+on you. I'm goin' to tie you so's you won't
+be givin' us the slip."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211"></a>"Oh, leave the kid be, Bill! He's all right!"
+the other man objected.</p>
+
+<p>"I ain't takin' chances," growled Bill. "I'm
+goin' to have some say about it, too."</p>
+
+<p>He fumbled in his pocket, and drawing forth
+some stout twine proceeded to tie Jamie's
+hands securely behind his back. Then he tied
+Jamie's feet, and gave him a push to the
+rear.</p>
+
+<p>"Now I guess you'll stay with us all right,"
+he grinned.</p>
+
+<p>"Aw, leave the kid be! What you want
+to tie him for?" Hank protested. "He
+can't get away. Better let him go anyhow."</p>
+
+<p>"You leave me be to do what I wants to
+do and I'll leave you be to do what you wants
+to," growled Bill. "I'm goin' to keep this
+kid fast. This is my business."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know as it's all your business,"
+snapped Hank. "I'm mixed up in it too,
+seems to me."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I caught the kid, and I'm goin' to
+have my say about what I do with him," Bill
+retorted. "I ain't goin' to let him make
+trouble for us, not if I knows what I'm about."</p>
+
+<p>Hank made no reply, but puffed silently
+at his pipe.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212"></a>Jamie was wide awake again. This man
+Bill meant some evil, and the little lad wondered
+vaguely what it could be that was to be done
+to himself, and what his fate was to be. He
+was vastly uncomfortable, too, with his hands
+tied behind his back, though he was glad enough
+to be permitted to lie down. He could scarcely
+keep the tears back, as he thought of the happy
+time in camp that had been planned, of the
+snug tent where he was to have slept with
+Doctor Joe, and of his own warm bed at home,
+and he wondered whether he would ever see
+The Jug again.</p>
+
+<p>"The boss'll be sore at us, Hank, if we ain't
+back to camp to-morrow," remarked Bill
+presently, breaking the silence. "He can be
+sore though if he wants to. He can't fire us
+fellers for bein' away even if he does get sore
+and cuss us out. He needs us bad, and he can't
+get any more men now. I don't mind his
+cussin'. Cussin' don't hurt a feller."</p>
+
+<p>"If the wind don't get worse and the snow
+lets up some so we can make out our way we
+better go back though as soon as it's light
+enough in the mornin'," answered Hank. "I
+wish I was out'n this business anyhow."</p>
+
+<p>"We can get across the Bay even if it does
+<a name="Page_213" id="Page_213"></a>snow some in the mornin', long's there ain't
+too much sea," said Bill. "I'm for gettin'
+away from here too. We've got the swag all
+right and nobody'll know about it, if we don't
+let this kid loose to blab. It was lucky we
+caught this feller before he found it, but he
+heard too much."</p>
+
+<p>"What you goin' to do with him, Bill?"</p>
+
+<p>"Croak him. I ain't goin' to take chances
+with him. It ain't my way to take chances
+I don't have to take."</p>
+
+<p>"You better not do any croakin', Bill. I
+won't stand for <i>that</i>. I'm tough, and I've
+done plenty of tough things in my day, but I
+never croaked a little kid like him, and I won't
+stand for it."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't you go and get soft now. 'Tain't
+any worse to croak a kid than a man. You'd
+croak a man if you had to, and this is a time
+when we've got to do it to save ourselves."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I won't stand for it while I'm sober,
+and I'm sober now even if I have had a drink
+or two." Hank reached for a firebrand with
+which to relight his pipe.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, you've got to stand for this. I'm
+mixed up in it just as much as you be, and I'm
+goin' to have some say. I ain't goin' to take
+<a name="Page_214" id="Page_214"></a>chances on him goin' back to his gang and
+givin' us away."</p>
+
+<p>"How you goin' to do it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Take him along in the boat and drop him
+overboard. That's the easiest way. There
+ain't much chance of anybody findin' him,
+and if they do they'll just think he got
+drowned some way hisself. Dead folks don't
+talk."</p>
+
+<p>"That's somethin' I won't stand for! You
+can't go droppin' anybody overboard while
+I'm in the boat! Not if I know it!"</p>
+
+<p>"What you goin' to do, play the sucker?"
+Bill turned angrily toward his companion.
+"Maybe you'll go and peach!"</p>
+
+<p>"Don't you call me a sucker! Don't you
+say I'm a peacher!" Hank rose to his feet
+and faced Bill menacingly.</p>
+
+<p>For a moment Jamie thought the men were
+going to fight, but Bill remained seated and his
+manner suddenly changed. Jamie thought he
+acted as though he were afraid.</p>
+
+<p>"See here, Hank," Bill's voice was modified
+and conciliatory. "I ain't callin' you a sucker,
+and I ain't sayin' you'll peach. What's the
+use of us fellers fightin' about it? We're in
+this together and we're pardners. We've got
+<a name="Page_215" id="Page_215"></a>to hang together. What's the use of us fallin'
+out?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'm willin' to hang together but I won't
+be called a sucker or peacher by anybody,
+and I ain't goin' to stand for any croakin'
+neither while I've got a gun! Hear me?"</p>
+
+<p>"What we goin' to do about this here kid
+then? We can't let him go. He'll up and run
+back and blab. He's heard too much about
+our business. We don't want to go huntin'
+trouble, do we? Well, we'll be huntin' trouble
+if we let him go. He knows too much and he
+knows all about who we be too."</p>
+
+<p>"What does he know, now? He don't
+know anything except what you've gone and
+blabbed yourself. We just caught him tryin'
+to swipe our cache. The stuff is our'n. 'Tain't
+his'n. Our stuff is our'n, ain't it? What
+can he blab about? That's what I want to
+know!"</p>
+
+<p>"He'll go and tell folks we've got this here
+swag from the ship, and it'll go to the boss.
+That's what he knows, and that's what he'll
+blab."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, what we've got is our'n. He can't
+prove we've got that there swag, and we'll
+hide it where the boss can't find it. He hain't
+<a name="Page_216" id="Page_216"></a>seen any swag around, has he? He can't say
+he has neither, and he won't. He just thought
+maybe we had that there fox skin. What's
+that got to do with us? We don't care what
+he thinks, and what he thinks won't hurt us
+as I knows of. What we've got and what we
+ain't got don't make any difference to these
+fellers. What they don't know won't hurt
+'em. It ain't theirs, and nobody better go
+meddlin' in what I has and does. Let that
+there kid go now, Bill, and get him off'n our
+hands."</p>
+
+<p>"You just leave him to me, Hank. I
+ain't goin' to let him go and blab, I say, and get
+both of us in a hole. I've got <i>some</i> say, hain't
+I, Hank?"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, don't do any croakin' when I'm around
+to see, that's all I've got to say. He's your'n
+to do the way you want to with. I won't
+have any finger in it. It's your job, it ain't
+mine."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I'll do the croakin' some other way.
+You needn't have anything to do about it if
+you're afraid. I'll do it all by myself."</p>
+
+<p>"Afraid or no afraid I ain't goin' to be
+mixed up in any croakin', and that ends it as
+far as I go."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217"></a>Hank knocked the ashes from his pipe,
+refilled it from the black plug, and lifting a red
+hot coal from the fire placed it upon the bowl,
+and puffed for a moment. When the tobacco
+was glowing to his satisfaction, he flicked the
+coal back into the fire, and sat silently
+smoking.</p>
+
+<p>Jamie, lying quiet, had listened to the
+conversation of the two men. He was wide
+awake now. He did not understand the significance
+of "croaking," but the word had an
+ominous sound. It referred to something the
+man called Bill wished to do to him and something
+to which the man called Hank objected.
+He understood, however, the threat to throw
+him into the Bay. The fellow Bill wished to
+do this while Hank was determined to prevent
+it.</p>
+
+<p>Instinctively Jamie felt that Hank was only
+defending him in order to protect himself.
+He had no personal interest in him, but did
+not propose to be involved in any trouble that
+might arise through some action that Bill
+wished to take. He was glad when, finally,
+it appeared settled that he was not to be
+thrown into the sea.</p>
+
+<p>Bill arose and replenished the fire, and
+<a name="Page_218" id="Page_218"></a>following Hank's example refilled and lighted
+his pipe, then reseated himself.</p>
+
+<p>Neither of the men spoke. Beyond their
+great hulking figures the fire gleamed and sent
+a circle of radiance. Beyond the circle the forest
+lay as black as a tomb. The snow fell steadily,
+and the wind sighed and moaned ominously
+through the tree tops.</p>
+
+<p>What were Doctor Joe and the lads doing?
+Were they searching for him through the
+blackness of the night and the storm? If
+he had only followed Doctor Joe's instructions
+and returned to camp in season! Would these
+men kill him? Would he ever see the dear old
+home at The Jug again?</p>
+
+<p>With these thoughts flashing through his
+mind Jamie prayed a silent little prayer:</p>
+
+<p>"Dear Lord, don't let un kill me! Take
+me back to The Jug again!"</p>
+
+<p>Many times he repeated this to himself.
+Then there came to him something Thomas
+had once said when the mist was clouding
+his eyes:</p>
+
+<p>"Have plenty o' grit, lad, and a stout heart
+like a man."</p>
+
+<p>This comforted and strengthened him, and,
+like the prayer, he repeated it over and over
+<a name="Page_219" id="Page_219"></a>again to himself as he lay watching the silent
+men. For a long time he watched them and
+the fire beyond, and the falling snow and the
+black wall of the forest. Finally tired nature
+came to his relief. His eyes closed and he
+fell into a troubled sleep.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XVII" id="CHAPTER_XVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII</h3>
+
+<h2>LOST IN A BLIZZARD</h2>
+
+
+<p>After a time Jamie awoke. The two men
+were still sitting by the fire and were
+again drinking from the bottle. He was uncomfortable
+in his cramped position, but dared
+not move, and he lay very still and watched
+the men and the fire and the black wall of the
+mysterious, trackless forest beyond. Shadows
+rose and fell and flitted in and out of the circle
+of firelight. Weird and uncanny they seemed,
+taking strange forms like dancing spirits. In
+the darkness outside the firelight and moving
+shadows Jamie fancied that terrible ghoulish
+forms were stalking stealthily and grinning
+maliciously at him.</p>
+
+<p>For a long while Jamie lay awake and watched.
+Again and again the men drank from the bottle,
+and when they spoke at intervals their voices
+sounded unnatural and thick. Once one of
+them arose to replenish the fire, and he moved
+<a name="Page_221" id="Page_221"></a>unsteadily upon his feet, at which the little
+lad marvelled, for he was a large, strong man.
+Presently Jamie's eyes drooped again, and once
+more he slept.</p>
+
+<p>When he again awoke dawn was breaking.
+Snow was falling heavily. The two men were
+in a deep sleep. The fire had died down to a
+bed of coals, and Jamie was shivering with
+the cold.</p>
+
+<p>His arms were numb, and his body and limbs
+ached from the cramped position in which he
+lay because of his bound arms and feet. With
+some effort he turned over, and this brought
+him some relief, but not for long, and presently
+he rolled back to his original position that he
+might see the red coals of the fire.</p>
+
+<p>Jamie tried to move his hands, but his wrists
+were too firmly tied, and the effort brought
+only pain. Then he lay still and studied the
+smouldering fire. Behind it lay the remnants
+of a back log that had been burned through in
+the centre. The inner ends of the log, where
+it was separated, were, like the coals before it,
+red and glowing, and he thought that if he
+could push them together they would blaze
+and give out warmth.</p>
+
+<p>Then, suddenly, an idea flashed into Jamie's
+<a name="Page_222" id="Page_222"></a>brain. Those red ends of the log would burn
+the string that bound him, and he could free
+himself if he could only reach them and press
+the string against them.</p>
+
+<p>His movements in turning over had not
+disturbed his captors. They were still sleeping
+profoundly. From the condition of the fire
+it was evident they had been sitting by it
+the greater part of the night and had replenished
+it at a late hour, else all the coals would have
+been dead.</p>
+
+<p>Hank lay at the opposite end of the lean-to
+from Jamie, and Bill in the centre, with their
+feet toward the fire. Jamie was lying at the
+back, his head near Bill's head and his feet
+toward the end of the lean-to farthest from
+Hank.</p>
+
+<p>For several minutes Jamie studied the
+position of each and the possibilities of working
+his way out of the lean-to without awakening
+the men. Finally he determined to make an
+attempt to gain his freedom.</p>
+
+<p>Cautiously and as noiselessly as possible he
+began to wriggle away, inch by inch, from
+Bill, and toward the fire. Several times he
+fancied the men moved restlessly in their
+sleep, but when he looked toward them
+<a name="Page_223" id="Page_223"></a>they appeared to be still sleeping heavily.
+On each occasion, however, he lay still until
+he became wholly satisfied that he had
+been mistaken and that they had not been
+disturbed.</p>
+
+<p>Little by little he edged away until at length
+he was well outside the lean-to. His efforts
+were painful and slow, but in the course of half
+an hour he was near enough to the end of
+the log to touch it with his bound feet. His
+exertions had set his blood in motion and
+inspired him with hope of success.</p>
+
+<p>With much care and patience he pushed
+the stick until he was able to rest the string,
+where it crossed between his ankles, upon the
+glowing end. Drawing his feet as far apart
+as possible, with all the strength he possessed,
+he was quickly rewarded by feeling a relaxation,
+and in a moment his heart leaped with joy.
+The string was severed.</p>
+
+<p>Squirming around upon his chest, Jamie
+arose to a kneeling position, and then stood
+erect. So far as his legs were concerned he
+was free.</p>
+
+<p>Jamie's first impulse was to run wildly away,
+but he restrained himself. Standing over the
+men he looked down upon them. Neither had
+<a name="Page_224" id="Page_224"></a>moved, and to all appearances they were sleeping
+as soundly as ever.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm thinkin' now I'll try to burn off the
+string on my hands too," he decided. "'Twill
+be easier gettin' on with un free, and I'll
+travel a rare lot faster with my arms loose."</p>
+
+<p>Burning the strings from his wrists, however,
+proved a much more difficult problem than
+burning them from his ankles. He sat down
+with his back to the hot end of the stick, but
+discovered that it was no easy matter to find
+just the right position between the wrists.
+Several efforts resulted only in painful burns
+on his hands, but he was not discouraged, and
+finally was rewarded. The string where it
+crossed between his wrists was brought into
+contact with the sharp point of the glowing
+hot stick, and though the reflected heat burned
+him cruelly he held the string pressed against
+the fire until at last it crumbled away and his
+hands flew apart.</p>
+
+<p>"She took grit," said he, "but I made out
+to do un."</p>
+
+<p>With the joy of freedom and the anxiety to
+escape his tormentors, Jamie was oblivious to
+the pain of his burned and blistered wrists.
+He could use both hands and feet, and was
+<a name="Page_225" id="Page_225"></a>confident that he would soon find the camp and
+his friends.</p>
+
+<p>Jamie ran as fast as his short legs would
+carry him. The snow was nearly knee deep,
+but it was soft and feathery and he scarcely
+gave it thought at first. He had no doubt
+that he knew exactly in which direction camp
+lay, and it never entered his head that he might
+go wrong or lose his way as he dashed through
+the woods at the best speed of which he was
+capable.</p>
+
+<p>Presently the impediment of the snow compelled
+him to reduce his gait to a walk, and
+for nearly an hour he pushed on in what he
+supposed was a straight line, when he came
+suddenly upon fresh axe cuttings and a moment
+later saw through the thickly falling snow a
+familiar lean-to. He stopped in consternation
+and fright, scarcely knowing which way to turn.
+He was within fifty feet of the two desperate
+men from whom he had so recently fled. In
+the storm he had made a complete circuit.</p>
+
+<p>The men were still soundly sleeping, and
+instinctively Jamie backed away. He had lost
+a full hour of valuable time. The men might
+awake at any moment, discover his absence
+and trail him and overtake him in the snow.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226"></a>These thoughts flashed through Jamie's mind,
+and in wild panic he turned and ran until at
+length exhaustion brought him to a halt.</p>
+
+<p>"They'll sure be cotchin' me," he panted,
+"and I'm not knowin' the way in the snow!
+I'll be goin' right around and comin' back
+again to the same place if I don't look out!
+I can't bide here," he continued in desperation.
+"I'll have to go somewheres else or they'll
+sure cotch me!"</p>
+
+<p>Bewildered and frightened Jamie looked
+wildly about him. Then he bethought himself
+of the compass in his pocket. Eagerly drawing
+it forth he held it in his hand and studied its
+face.</p>
+
+<p>"The Bay's to the suth'ard, whatever," he
+calculated. "If the Bay's to the suth'ard the
+brook's to the east'ard. I'll be lettin' the
+compass pilot me to the east'ard. 'Twill take
+me the right direction whatever."</p>
+
+<p>Levelling the compass carefully in his hand
+so that the needle swung freely he found the
+east, and as rapidly as his little legs would
+carry him set out again in his effort to escape
+the two sleeping men and to find camp and his
+friends.</p>
+
+<p>At intervals he stopped to consult his compass.
+<a name="Page_227" id="Page_227"></a>Then he would hurry forward again as fast
+as ever he could go through the snow, looking
+behind him fearfully, half expecting each time
+to see the men in close pursuit, and always
+with the dread that a gruff voice in the rear
+would command him to halt, or that a rifle
+bullet would be sent after him without
+warning.</p>
+
+<p>As time passed and there was no indication
+that he was followed, Jamie began to feel some
+degree of security. Because of the storm it
+was unlikely that the men would venture upon
+the Bay. They had kept late hours drinking
+at the bottle, and unless they were awakened
+by the cold they would in all probability sleep
+late and therefore not discover his absence
+until the thickly falling snow had so far covered
+his trail as to preclude the possibility of them
+following it with certainty.</p>
+
+<p>With his mind more or less relieved on this
+point, Jamie suddenly realized that he was
+hungry. It was nearing midday. He had
+eaten nothing for twenty-four hours, and he
+had the normal appetite of a healthy boy.
+The snow had perceptibly increased in depth
+since his escape from the lean-to, and walking
+was correspondingly hard. He was so hungry
+<a name="Page_228" id="Page_228"></a>and so weary that at length he could scarcely
+force one foot ahead of the other.</p>
+
+<p>The wind was rising, and in crossing an open
+frozen marsh the snow drifted before the gale
+in clouds so dense as to be suffocating. The
+storm was attaining the proportions of a
+blizzard, and when Jamie again reached the
+shelter of the forest beyond the marsh he found
+it necessary to stop to rest and regain his
+breath.</p>
+
+<p>"'Twill never do to try to cross another
+mesh," he decided. "I'm like to be overcome
+with un and perish before I finds my
+way out of un to the timber. I'll stick to the
+woods, and if I can't stick to un I'll have to
+bide where I is till the snow stops. I wonders
+now if Doctor Joe and David is out lookin'
+for me. I'm not thinkin' they'd bide in the
+tent with me lost out here and they not knowin'
+where I is."</p>
+
+<p>When he was rested a little he arose, took
+his direction with the compass, and floundered
+on through the snow.</p>
+
+<p>"They's sure out somewhere lookin' for me,"
+he thought, "but 'tis snowin' so hard they
+never will find me! I'll have to keep goin' till
+I finds camp. 'Tis strange now I'm not comin'
+<a name="Page_229" id="Page_229"></a>to the brook, 'tis wonderful strange. I'm
+thinkin' though I were crossin' two meshes
+with the men in the night, and I've only been
+crossin' one goin' back to-day. I'm fearin'
+I'll never be able to cross un though, when I
+comes to the next un."</p>
+
+<p>Presently, as Jamie had thought would be
+the case, he came to another marsh. It satisfied
+him that he was going in the right direction,
+but at the same time it lay out before him as
+a well-nigh impassable barrier. The wind
+was driving the snow across it in swirling dense
+clouds, and he stood for a little in the shelter
+of the trees and viewed it with heavy heart.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis a bigger mesh than the other," he
+commented to himself, "but I'll have to try
+to cross un. I can't bide here. I'll freeze
+to death with no shelter and I has no axe for
+makin' a shelter. I'm not knowin' what to do."</p>
+
+<p>For a little while he hesitated, then he plunged
+out upon the edge of the marsh. He was
+nearly swept from his feet, and to recover
+his breath he was forced to retreat again to
+the woods. Three times he tried to face the
+storm-swept marsh, but each time was sent
+staggering back to shelter. It was a task
+beyond the strength and endurance of so young
+<a name="Page_230" id="Page_230"></a>a lad, and utterly exhausted and bitterly
+disappointed, he sat down upon the trunk of
+a fallen tree to rest.</p>
+
+<p>"I never can make un whilst the nasty
+weather lasts," he acknowledged. "I'm fair
+scrammed and I'll have to wait for the wind
+to ease before I tries un again."</p>
+
+<p>He could scarce restrain the tears. It was
+a bitter disappointment. He was so hungry,
+and so weary, and wished so hard to reach the
+safety of camp and freedom from the still
+present danger of being recaptured.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll have plenty o' grit and a stout heart
+like a man," he presently declared. "I don't
+mind bein' a bit hungry, and I'll never be
+givin' up! I'll never give up whatever! Pop
+says plenty o' grit'll pull a man out o' most
+any fix. I'm in a bad fix now, and I'll have
+grit and won't be gettin' scared. 'Twill never
+do to be gettin' scared whatever."</p>
+
+<p>Jamie sat quietly upon the log, and presently
+found himself dozing. He sprang to his feet,
+for sleeping under these conditions was
+dangerous. He tried to walk about, but was
+so tired that he again returned to the log to
+rest. It was growing colder, and he shivered.
+The storm was increasing in fury.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231"></a>"I'm not knowin' what to do!" he said
+despairingly. "If I goes on I'll perish and if
+I keeps still I'll freeze to death and I'm too
+wearied to move about to keep warm. 'Tis
+likely the storm'll last the night through whatever,
+and I'll never be able to stick un out
+that long."</p>
+
+<p>Jamie again found himself dozing, and again
+he got upon his feet.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll have to be doin' somethin'," said he.
+"I'll keep my grit and try to think of somethin'
+to do or I'll perish."</p>
+
+<p>Jamie was right. He was in peril, and grave
+peril. Even though the storm-swept marsh
+had not stood in his way he was quite too
+weary to walk farther. He was thrown entirely
+upon his own resources. His life depended
+upon his own initiative, for he was quite beyond
+help from others. It was a great unpeopled
+wilderness in which Jamie was lost, and he
+was but a wee lad, and even though Doctor
+Joe and David were looking for him there was
+scarce a chance that they could find him in
+the raging storm.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XVIII" id="CHAPTER_XVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII</h3>
+
+<h2>A PLACE TO "BIDE"</h2>
+
+
+<p>Dazed and almost hopeless Jamie stood
+and gazed about him at the thick falling
+snow. His body and brain were tired, but
+some immediate action was imperative or he
+would be overcome by his weariness and the
+cold.</p>
+
+<p>"If I were only bringin' an axe, I could fix
+a place to bide in and cut wood for a fire,"
+he said. "If I were only bringin' an axe!"</p>
+
+<p>He thrust his hands deep into his pocket
+and felt the big, stout jack-knife that Doctor
+Joe had given him, and he drew it out.</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe now I can fix un with just this,"
+he said hopefully. "I've got to have grit
+and I've got to try my best whatever."</p>
+
+<p>He looked up and there, within two feet
+of the log upon which he had been sitting,
+were two spruce trees about six feet apart.</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe I can fix un right here," he commented,<a name="Page_233" id="Page_233"></a>
+"and maybe I can lay a fire against
+the log and if I can get un afire she'll burn a
+long while and keep un warm."</p>
+
+<p>With much effort he cut and trimmed a stiff,
+strong pole. The lower limbs of the trees were
+not above four feet from the ground, and upon
+these he rested his pole, extending it from
+tree to tree. This was to form the ridge pole
+to support the roof of his lean-to, for he was
+to form a shelter similar to that improvised
+by the two men the evening before.</p>
+
+<p>Then he cut other poles to form the roof,
+and resting them upon the ridge pole and the
+ground at a convenient angle to make a commodious
+space beneath, he covered them with
+a thick thatch of boughs, which were easily
+broken from the overhanging limbs of surrounding
+trees. This done he enclosed the
+ends of his shelter in like manner, and laid
+beneath it a floor of boughs.</p>
+
+<p>Jamie surveyed his work with satisfaction
+and hope. No snow could reach the cave-like
+interior; it was as well protected and as comfortable
+as ever a lean-to could be made, and
+a very little fire would warm it. Though much
+smaller, it was quite as good a shelter as that
+made by the two men, and possessed the added
+<a name="Page_234" id="Page_234"></a>advantage of closed ends, which would render
+it much easier to heat. He had occupied more
+than two hours in its construction, and it had
+called for ingenuity and much hard work.</p>
+
+<p>The opening of the lean-to faced the fallen
+tree trunk, which lay before it in such a position
+that it would serve excellently as a backlog.</p>
+
+<p>Though he had no axe with which to cut
+firewood, he soon discovered upon scouting
+about that scattered through the forest were
+many dried and broken limbs that could be
+had for the gathering, and in a little while he
+had accumulated a sufficient supply to serve
+for several hours.</p>
+
+<p>This done he pushed away the snow from
+before the fallen tree trunk as best he could.
+Using as tinder a handful of the long hairy
+moss that hung from the inner limbs of the
+spruce trees, he lighted it with a match from
+the tin box salvaged the previous day at the
+big rock. Placing the burning moss upon the
+cleared spot next the log he applied small
+sticks and, as they caught fire, larger ones,
+until presently a fire was blazing and crackling
+cheerily in front of his lean-to with the fallen
+tree as a backlog to reflect the heat.</p>
+
+<p>Utterly weary Jamie stretched himself upon
+<a name="Page_235" id="Page_235"></a>his bed of boughs, and it seemed to him that
+he had never been in a cosier place in all his
+life.</p>
+
+<p>"Pop were sayin' right when he says grit
+will help a man over any tight place," breathed
+Jamie contentedly. "If I were givin' up I'd
+sure perished before to-morrow mornin', for
+'tis growin' wonderful cold; but I has grit
+and a stout heart like a man, and I gets a
+place to bide and a fine warm fire to heat un."</p>
+
+<p>With the first moments of relaxation, Jamie
+became aware that his wrists were exceedingly
+painful, and upon examination he discovered
+that they had been burned much worse than
+he had realized in his attempts to sever the
+string that bound them. Large blisters had
+been raised, and one of the blisters had been
+broken, doubtless while he was engaged in
+building his lean-to shelter. The loose skin
+had been rubbed off, and the angry red wound
+left unprotected.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll have to fix un," he declared. "The
+sore places'll be gettin' rubbed against things,
+and be a wonderful lot worse and I leaves un
+bide as they is."</p>
+
+<p>In the course of the first aid instruction,
+Doctor Joe had taught Jamie, as well as David
+<a name="Page_236" id="Page_236"></a>and Andy, the art of applying bandages, but
+now Jamie had no bandages to apply. For a
+little while he helplessly contemplated his
+wrists. But for the fact that they were becoming
+exceedingly painful he would have
+decided to ignore them, for in his wearied
+condition it was an effort to do anything.</p>
+
+<p>"I knows how I'll fix un," he said at length.
+"I'll cut pieces from the bottom o' my shirt
+to bind un up with. They'll keep un from
+gettin' rubbed whatever, and when I gets
+back to camp Doctor Joe'll fix un up right."</p>
+
+<p>This he proceeded to do at once with the
+aid of his jack-knife, and presently had two
+serviceable bandages ready to apply.</p>
+
+<p>"Doctor Joe were sayin' how to keep the air
+away from burns by usin' oil or molasses or
+flour or somethin'," he hesitated. "And he
+were sayin' to keep sores from gettin' dirt
+into un whatever. He says the sores'll be
+gettin' inflicted or infested or somethin'&mdash;I'm
+not rememberin' just what 'twere, but somethin'
+bad whatever&mdash;if they gets dirt into un. I've
+been wearin' the shirt three days, and I'm
+thinkin' 'tis not as clean as Doctor Joe wants
+the bindin' for sores to be, and I'll cover the
+sore place where the blisters were rubbin' off
+<a name="Page_237" id="Page_237"></a>with fir sap. That'll keep un clean. Pop says
+'tis fine for sores."</p>
+
+<p>Crawling out of his nest Jamie found a young
+balsam fir tree, and with his sharp jack-knife
+cut from the bark several of the little sacs in
+which sap is secreted. He had often seen
+Thomas cut them and daub the contents upon
+cuts and bruises, and sometimes even have him
+and the other boys take the sap as medicine.
+Returning to the lean-to he pierced the ends
+of the sacs with the point of his knife, and
+carefully smeared the contents over his burned
+wrist where the skin was broken, taking care
+that all of the exposed flesh was well covered
+with the sap. Jamie had, indeed, fallen upon
+the best antiseptic dressing that the surrounding
+woods supplied.</p>
+
+<p>This done to his satisfaction, he bound his
+wrists with the improvised bandages, applying
+them carefully, after the manner in which
+Doctor Joe had taught him in his lessons in
+first aid.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tain't so bad," commented Jamie holding
+the wrists up and surveying them with satisfaction.
+"They feels a wonderful lot easier,
+whatever. But I'd never been knowin' how
+if 'tweren't for Doctor Joe showin' me."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238"></a>Jamie stretched himself upon the bed of
+boughs, and for a time lay watching the fire
+and thickly falling snow and listening to the
+wind shrieking and howling through the tree
+tops. Several times he fancied he heard the
+report of distant rifle shots, and at these times
+he would start up and listen intently and look
+cautiously out, half expecting and fearful that
+he would see the two lumbermen coming to
+recapture him.</p>
+
+<p>But no one came to disturb him, and he
+assured himself at length that he had heard
+only the cracking of dead branches in the
+storm, and that there had been no rifle shots.
+Then, at last, his eyes drooped and he slept.</p>
+
+<p>Hours afterward Jamie awoke. He was
+shivering with the cold. The fire had burned
+out, save the backlog which still glowed. It
+was night. The storm had passed and the
+wind dropped to fitful blasts. The stars were
+shining brightly, and the sky was clear save
+for feathery, fast moving cloud patches.</p>
+
+<p>Jamie rebuilt the fire, and lay down to await
+morning. He was so hungry that he could
+scarce lie still, but again his eyes drooped
+and again he slept.</p>
+
+<p>It was near daybreak when Jamie was
+<a name="Page_239" id="Page_239"></a>startled by some unusual noise, and sat up
+with a jerk. He listened intently, and satisfied
+that someone was approaching sprang up and
+looked cautiously out, seized with panic and
+ready for flight. In the dim starlight he could
+plainly see two men coming toward him over
+the marsh.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_240" id="Page_240"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XIX" id="CHAPTER_XIX"></a>CHAPTER XIX</h3>
+
+<h2>SEARCHING THE WHITE WILDERNESS</h2>
+
+
+<p>Nearly three hours passed before Doctor
+Joe and David returned to camp, disheartened
+and thoroughly alarmed, to report that
+they had found no trace of Jamie. In the thick-falling
+snow and darkness they had been forced
+to relinquish the search until daylight should
+come to their assistance.</p>
+
+<p>Andy and the boys were dazed. It could
+hardly be comprehended or credited that Jamie
+was, indeed, lost. They ate their belated supper
+in silence, half expecting that he would, after
+all, come walking in upon them. Doctor Joe
+was grave and preoccupied. Several times,
+now he, now David, went out into the night
+to stand and listen in the storm, but all they
+heard was the wail of wind in the tree tops.</p>
+
+<p>At last, with heavy hearts, they went to bed,
+upon Doctor Joe's advice. Andy asked that
+he might pass the night in the tent with Doctor
+<a name="Page_241" id="Page_241"></a>Joe and David, and so it was arranged. Neither
+Andy nor David, more worried than they had
+ever been in all their lives before, felt in the
+least like sleep. Doctor Joe did not lie down
+with them. For a long while the two lads
+lay awake and watched him crouching before
+the stove smoking his pipe, his face grave and
+thoughtful. He had spoken no word of encouragement,
+and the lads knew that he was
+troubled beyond expression.</p>
+
+<p>The wind was rising. In sudden gusts of
+anger it dashed the snow against the tent in
+swirling blasts, and moaned dismally through
+the tree tops. The crackling fire in the stove,
+usually so cheerful, only served now to increase
+their sorrow. It offered warmth and comfort and
+protection from the night and cold and drifting
+snow, which Jamie, if he had not perished,
+was denied. They could only think of him as
+wandering and suffering in the cold and darkness,
+hungry and miserable, and they condemned
+themselves.</p>
+
+<p>When sleep finally carried the lads into
+unconsciousness, Doctor Joe's tall figure was
+still crouching before the stove, and when
+they awoke he was already up and had kindled
+a fresh fire in the stove, though it was not yet
+<a name="Page_242" id="Page_242"></a>day, and the tent was lighted by the flickering
+flame of a candle.</p>
+
+<p>"'Twill be daylight by the time we've
+finished breakfast," said Doctor Joe as the
+lads sat up. "It's snowing harder than ever,
+but I think we had better go out as soon as
+we can see and have a look up the brook.
+Jamie may not be so far away. We may find
+him bivouacked quite close to camp. The
+snow is getting deep and we shall not find
+travelling easy."</p>
+
+<p>"We'll be lookin' the best we can, whatever,"
+agreed David. "I couldn't bide in the tent
+with Jamie gone. I'm wakin' with a wonderful
+heavy heart. I'm findin' it hard to believe
+he's not about camp, and I were just dreamin'
+about he bein' lost."</p>
+
+<p>"That's the way I feels too," said Andy.
+"I wakes feelin' most like I'd have to cry.
+Can't I be goin' with you and Davy? I never
+can bide here whilst you're away, Doctor
+Joe."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, we three will go and we'll take some
+of the other lads with us, though we'll have
+to leave somebody in camp to keep the fire
+going," agreed Doctor Joe. "We'll need warm
+tents when we come back, if we bring Jamie
+<a name="Page_243" id="Page_243"></a>with us, and I hope we'll find him none the
+worse for his night out."</p>
+
+<p>"'Tisn't like 'twere winter," suggested David
+hopefully. "'Tisn't so cold, if he were havin'
+matches to put on a fire, but I'm doubtin' he
+has matches."</p>
+
+<p>"Let us hope he had. Andy, suppose you
+call the others," suggested Doctor Joe.
+"Breakfast is nearly ready."</p>
+
+<p>Andy was already dressed, and hurrying
+out he presently returned with the other lads.
+Breakfast of venison and bread with hot tea
+was hurriedly eaten, while they put forth all
+sorts of theories as to the cause of Jamie's
+disappearance and the possibilities of finding him.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm thinkin' now," said David with a
+more hopeful view as daylight began to filter
+through the tent, "that Jamie'll be knowin'
+how to fix a shelter, and that we'll be findin'
+he safe and that he'll be just losin' his way a
+bit in the storm. If he has matches he'll sure
+be puttin' a fire on."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm doubtin' he has the matches," suggested
+Andy discouragingly. "He weren't thinkin'
+to be away from camp and he weren't takin'
+any. He were never on the trails, and he'd
+sure be forgettin' to take un."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_244" id="Page_244"></a>"Let us hope he has them," Doctor Joe
+encouraged. "If he has matches I'm sure he'll
+be safe enough."</p>
+
+<p>"'Twere my fault he were gettin' lost," said
+Seth. "He'd never been gettin' lost if I'd
+only kept he in sight the way you said to do."</p>
+
+<p>"No," objected Doctor Joe, "we'll not say
+it was anybody's fault."</p>
+
+<p>Presently they were ready. Seth and Micah
+were detailed to remain in camp, and the others
+set forth, David and Doctor Joe carrying their
+rifles.</p>
+
+<p>In much the same manner as that adopted
+in the search for the rock the previous day,
+Doctor Joe and the boys spread out on the
+left, or westward, side of the brook. Now,
+however, they were much closer together,
+because they could see so short a distance
+through the snow. Walking was much harder,
+and their progress correspondingly slower.</p>
+
+<p>Thus they continued to the farthest point
+reached before turning back the previous day,
+David or Doctor Joe now and again firing
+shots from their rifles. Then they turned back,
+making the return just to the westward of the
+trail made by Doctor Joe, who was on the
+left flank as they passed up the brook.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_245" id="Page_245"></a>"There's a rock! There's a big rock!"
+shouted David, as the rock where Jamie had
+begun his search for the cache loomed high
+through the snow.</p>
+
+<p>Every one ran to the rock, and as they
+gathered by its side, Andy exclaimed:</p>
+
+<p>"I knows now what Jamie does! He were
+near enough to see the rock! He were the last
+one beyond Seth, and he finds un and he goes
+huntin' the cache by himself, and it gets dark
+and he gets lost when the snow comes!"</p>
+
+<p>"That sounds reasonable," admitted Doctor
+Joe. "I shouldn't be the least surprised if
+you were right! It's more than probable
+that's just what happened! The thing now is
+to find the direction Jamie probably took
+from here, and the snow has covered all trace
+of him."</p>
+
+<p>"With his trail all covered, there'll be no
+trackin' he. What'll we do about un?" asked
+David. "'Tis hard to think out what way
+Jamie'd be like to go from here."</p>
+
+<p>"Let's try goin' the way the paper said the
+cache was," suggested Andy. "Maybe Jamie
+finds un in the tree and climbs the tree and
+falls and hurts himself."</p>
+
+<p>"Andy is right," agreed Doctor Joe. "It is
+<a name="Page_246" id="Page_246"></a>quite likely he used his copy of the directions
+to find the cache, and that he went in the
+direction specified. We'll do the same."</p>
+
+<p>It did not take them long to find the
+hackmatack tree, and in doing so they stumbled
+upon the pile of rocks Jamie had built up for
+a compass rest. It was covered with snow,
+but was high enough to be discernible, and a
+careful clearing of the snow discovered the fact
+that the stones had been recently piled.</p>
+
+<p>"They may have been piled by the man
+who made the cache," suggested Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p>"He'd never been doin' that!" objected
+David. "'Twould make the tree too easy to
+find. I'm thinkin' 'twere Jamie piles un."</p>
+
+<p>"What would Jamie be pilin' the stones for
+now?" asked Lige sceptically. "He'd not
+be takin' time to go pilin' up stones that way."</p>
+
+<p>"He piles un to pilot us when we comes
+huntin' he," suggested David.</p>
+
+<p>They took the next direction, and in due
+time discovered the round rock, the top of
+which they likewise cleared of snow that they
+might make quite certain it was the rock for
+which they were searching. Then, in due
+time, Jamie's second pile of rocks and finally
+the birch tree were located.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_247" id="Page_247"></a>At the birch tree all clues were lost. Vainly
+they circled the surrounding country, firing
+rifles occasionally until they came to the edge
+of the marsh.</p>
+
+<p>"We'd never be findin' he on the mesh, if
+he gets out there," suggested David.</p>
+
+<p>"No," agreed Doctor Joe, "and there's no
+reason to suppose that he crossed it to the
+other side."</p>
+
+<p>"That's what I thinks," said David. "He's
+somewheres this side of the mesh. He'd never
+cross un. He'd be knowin' there's no mesh
+between here and camp."</p>
+
+<p>"He'd know 'twere not the way to camp,"
+declared Andy. "Jamie'd never be forgettin'
+that he crosses no mesh comin' from camp
+however turned about he is. He'd never be
+so turned about as that."</p>
+
+<p>"We'll search all the country, then, between
+this marsh and the brook," suggested Doctor
+Joe.</p>
+
+<p>They could not know that Jamie, on the
+opposite side of the marsh, was at that moment
+in a snug shelter, and had been listening to
+their rifle shots, and supposing them to be
+the breaking of dead branches in the wind.
+Jamie was too small and too inexperienced
+<a name="Page_248" id="Page_248"></a>to face and weather the storm on the marsh,
+unassisted, but Doctor Joe or David or even
+Andy might have crossed it. How often it
+happens that an obstacle that might be surmounted
+turns us back at the very door of
+success!</p>
+
+<p>Wearily they trailed back through the woods,
+and up and down until darkness finally forced
+them to return to camp unsuccessful and heavy
+hearted. The younger lads were almost too
+weary to drag their feet behind them. They
+had eaten nothing since their early breakfast,
+but Seth and Micah, anxiously watching and
+hoping, had a hot supper of fried venison
+and bread and tea ready, and as soon as they
+had finished their meal, Doctor Joe directed
+that they go to bed and rest.</p>
+
+<p>Long before daybreak Doctor Joe was stirring.
+He lighted the fire, and when the kettle boiled
+roused David. Breakfast was ready when
+Andy awoke.</p>
+
+<p>"Is you startin' so early?" he asked, rubbing
+his eyes. "'Tis wonderful early. We can't
+see to travel till light with snow fallin'."</p>
+
+<p>"Clear and fine outside!" said Doctor Joe,
+"I'm not satisfied that Jamie didn't cross
+the marsh. It's likely to be a long hard tramp
+<a name="Page_249" id="Page_249"></a>and David and I are going alone this morning
+because we can travel faster. If we don't
+find Jamie by noon we'll come back after you
+and the other lads. You'll be fresh and rested
+then for the afternoon's search. We can't
+give it up till we find Jamie."</p>
+
+<p>"I'd be keepin' up with you," protested
+Andy.</p>
+
+<p>"If you go we'll have to take some of the
+others," objected Doctor Joe. "The snow is
+deep and they'll not be able to travel as fast
+as we shall. Let us go alone and if we need
+you we'll come for you."</p>
+
+<p>And so it was arranged.</p>
+
+<p>Presently David and Doctor Joe set forth
+in the frosty starlit morning. They turned
+their steps toward the marsh, and were near
+its eastern border when David stopped and
+sniffed the air.</p>
+
+<p>"I smell smoke!" he exclaimed eagerly.</p>
+
+<p>"Are you sure?" asked Doctor Joe, also
+sniffing. "I don't smell it."</p>
+
+<p>"There's a smell o' smoke!" insisted David.
+"The wind's from the west'ard, and the smoke
+comes from over the mesh. There's a fire
+somewheres over there."</p>
+
+<p>"Your nose is keener than mine," said Doctor
+<a name="Page_250" id="Page_250"></a>Joe hopefully. "Go ahead, Davy. We'll see
+if you really smell smoke."</p>
+
+<p>David led the way out upon the marsh, and
+they had gone but a short distance when Doctor
+Joe was quite sure that he, also, smelled smoke.
+David hurried on with Doctor Joe at his heels.</p>
+
+<p>"There's somebody movin'!" exclaimed
+David presently. "See un? See un? 'Tis
+sure Jamie!"</p>
+
+<p>Then he ran and Doctor Joe ran, and thus
+they came upon the frightened Jamie, standing
+uncertainly before his lean-to.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_251" id="Page_251"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XX" id="CHAPTER_XX"></a>CHAPTER XX</h3>
+
+<h2>"WOLVES!" YELLED ANDY</h2>
+
+
+<p>"Jamie! Jamie! We've been lookin' and
+lookin' for you!" shouted David, quite
+overcome with excitement and relief.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm so glad 'tis you!" exclaimed Jamie,
+tears springing to his eyes as he recognized
+Doctor Joe and David. "I was scared!"</p>
+
+<p>"Safe and sound as ever you could be, and
+all of us thinking you were lost under a snow-drift!"
+Doctor Joe in vast good humour
+slapped Jamie on the shoulder. "You gritty
+little rascal! I'll never worry about you again!
+Here you are as able to take care of yourself
+as any man on The Labrador! Come on now
+back to camp and we'll hear all about your
+adventures when you've eaten. Are you
+hungry?"</p>
+
+<p>"Wonderful hungry!" admitted Jamie.</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, we'll be makin' haste, for Andy and
+the lads are sore worried," said David.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_252" id="Page_252"></a>In single file, Doctor Joe and David tramping
+the trail for Jamie, they set out for camp.
+An hour later they crossed the brook, and
+with the first glimpse of the tents heard a
+shout of joy, as Andy and the other lads discovered
+them and came running to meet
+them.</p>
+
+<p>While Jamie satisfied an accumulated appetite
+he answered no end of questions. Every one
+was vastly excited as he related the story of
+his experience.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tweren't Lem Horn's silver they has after
+all," Jamie declared. "There were nothin'
+in the cache but the bottles they drinks from,
+and they were thinkin' a wonderful lot o'
+them bottles."</p>
+
+<p>David, in high indignation, was for setting
+out at once in search of the two lumbermen,
+but it was decided that they had doubtless
+already returned to the lumber camp.</p>
+
+<p>"They'd probably say that they were only
+having sport with you, Jamie, and meant you
+no harm," said Doctor Joe. "The people over
+at their camp would believe them rather than
+a little Labrador lad. We may as well waste
+no time with them. We'll leave them alone,
+and be thankful that Jamie is safe and well
+<a name="Page_253" id="Page_253"></a>except for the burned wrists, and they'll soon
+be cured."</p>
+
+<p>"And we'll be havin' a fine time campin'
+here," agreed Jamie. "I wants to keep clear
+o' them men whatever."</p>
+
+<p>It was a week later when they broke
+camp to return to The Jug, and when the
+visiting lads said good-bye and set sail to
+their homes across the Bay every one declared
+he had never had so good a time in all his
+life.</p>
+
+<p>With the coming of November the boats
+were hauled out of the water. The shores
+were already crusted with ice and the
+temperature never rose to the thawing point
+even in the midday sun. The mighty Frost
+King had ascended his throne and was asserting
+his relentless power. Presently all the world
+would be kneeling at his feet.</p>
+
+<p>Buckskin moccasins with heavy blanket duffle
+socks of wool took the place of sealskin boots.
+The dry snow would not again soften to wet
+them until spring. The adiky, with its fur-trimmed
+hood, took the place of the jacket,
+soon to be augmented by sealskin netseks or
+caribou skin kulutuks.</p>
+
+<p>"The Bay's smokin'," David announced one
+<a name="Page_254" id="Page_254"></a>evening as he came in after feeding the dogs.
+"She'll soon freeze now."</p>
+
+<p>In the days that followed the smoke haze
+hung over the water until, one morning, the
+Bay was fast, and the lapping of the waves was
+not to be heard again for many months.</p>
+
+<p>The nine sledge dogs were in fine fettle.
+Handsome, big fellows they were, but fearsome
+and treacherous enough. They looked like
+sleek, fat wolves, and they were, indeed, but
+domesticated wolves. Friendly they seemed,
+but they were ever ready to take advantage
+of the helpless and unwary, and their great
+white fangs were not above tearing their own
+master into shreds should he ever be so careless
+as to stumble and fall among them.</p>
+
+<p>The sledge was taken out and overhauled by
+David. It was fourteen feet long and two and
+a half feet wide. Twenty cross-bars formed
+the top. Not a nail was used in its construction,
+for nails would not hold an hour on rough ice.
+Everything was bound with sealskin thongs.
+The sledge shoes were of iron. These David
+polished bright with sand, and then applied
+a coating of seal oil. Finally the harness and
+long sealskin traces were examined, and all
+was ready.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_255" id="Page_255"></a>It was the end of November when the Bay
+froze, but there was no certainty that travelling
+would be safe upon the sea ice beyond Fort
+Pelican before the beginning of January.
+Therefore Doctor Joe confined his visits to
+the Bay folk during December, and on his first
+tour Andy served as driver with Jamie as
+passenger.</p>
+
+<p>The dogs were harnessed after the Eskimo
+fashion. That is to say, "fan shape," and
+not, as is customary in Alaska and among
+white men of the far northwest, in tandem.</p>
+
+<p>Leading from the komatik (sledge) in front
+was a single thong of sealskin with a loop on
+its end. This was called the "bridle." Each
+dog had an individual trace, its end passed
+through the loop in the bridle and securely
+tied. Tinker, the leading dog, was fully thirty-five
+feet from the komatik when his trace was
+stretched to its full length. He had the longest
+trace of all. He was trained to respond to
+shouted directions, turning to the right when
+"ouk" was called, or left for "rudder," the
+word being repeated several times by the driver
+in rapid succession. When it was desired that
+the dogs should stop, "ah" was the order, and
+when they were to go forward "ooisht," or
+<a name="Page_256" id="Page_256"></a>"oksuit." The other dogs followed Tinker as
+a pack of wolves follows the leader. The two
+dogs directly behind Tinker had traces of
+equal length, but somewhat shorter, the pair
+behind them still shorter, and so on to the
+last pair.</p>
+
+<p>A long whip was used to keep them in subjection.
+This was of braided walrus hide an
+inch thick at its butt and tapering to a thin
+lash. To the butt was attached a short wooden
+handle a foot in length, to which was fastened
+a loop which was hooked over the protruding
+end of the forward cross-bar and the whip
+permitted to trail upon the ice when not in
+use, and at the same time it was always within
+the driver's reach.</p>
+
+<p>The boys had practised the manipulation of
+the whip all their lives. They could flick a
+square inch of ice at thirty feet with its tip.
+It was capable of a gentle tap, or the force of
+a pistol shot, at its wielder's discretion. The
+whip was the terror of the team, for even at
+his distance Tinker, the leader, could be brought
+to account if he failed to do his duty or obey
+commands.</p>
+
+<p>There was little sickness in the Bay, and after
+patching up a lumberman at Grampus River,
+<a name="Page_257" id="Page_257"></a>and providing some medicine for old Molly
+Budd's rheumatics, Andy and Jamie turned
+homeward with Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p>Near the mouth of Grampus River there was
+a section of "bad ice" or ice that was not always
+safe to be crossed, the result doubtless of
+cross currents in the tide. To avoid this
+bad ice Andy followed the shore for a considerable
+distance before turning northward for
+the twelve-mile run directly across the Bay
+to The Jug.</p>
+
+<p>It was a dull, cold, dreary day. The snow
+ground and squeaked under the sledge runners.
+Now and again a confusion of shore ridges
+rendered the hauling bad and the dogs lagged.</p>
+
+<p>They were midway between Grampus River
+and the place where they were to make the
+turn northward when Jamie warned:</p>
+
+<p>"Look out, Andy! There's some loose dogs
+comin' out of the woods! They'll be fightin'
+the team!"</p>
+
+<p>Six big beasts, larger even than Thomas
+Angus's big dogs, were trotting out of the woods
+and upon the ice a hundred yards in advance.
+The team saw them, and with a howl rushed
+forward to the attack.</p>
+
+<p>"Wolves!" yelled Andy. "They's wolves!"</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_258" id="Page_258"></a>The wolves were free. The dogs were bound
+by harness, and thus fettered were no match
+for the big, wild creatures. Andy's rifle was
+lashed upon the komatik. It was out of the
+question to free it in the moment before the
+wolves were upon them, and it was to be a
+hand-to-hand fight.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_259" id="Page_259"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XXI" id="CHAPTER_XXI"></a>CHAPTER XXI</h3>
+
+<h2>THE ALARM IN THE NIGHT</h2>
+
+
+<p>The clash came instantly. The wolf pack
+was upon the dogs, and dogs and wolves
+were at once a howling, snarling, fighting mass.
+Great bared fangs gleamed and snapped. It
+was a fight to the death, a primordial fight
+for the survival of the fittest.</p>
+
+<p>The attack was launched with such indescribable
+suddenness that Doctor Joe and Jamie
+had scarcely time to drop from the komatik
+before it was begun. Andy had instinctively
+seized his whip and began to ply it with every
+opening that offered. The first stroke caught
+a big wolf across the eyes, and with howls
+of pain it immediately endeavoured to extricate
+itself from the fight. The lash had blinded it.</p>
+
+<p>With feverish haste Doctor Joe and Jamie
+undid the axe and rifle from the komatik,
+and Doctor Joe with the axe and Jamie with
+<a name="Page_260" id="Page_260"></a>the rifle charged the fighting beasts. A lucky
+blow from the axe split a wolf's head. Jamie
+quickly found that to shoot at a distance he
+must take the risk of killing one of the dogs,
+but watching for an opening, with the muzzle
+of the rifle within an inch of a big wolf's body,
+he fired and another wolf was disposed of.</p>
+
+<p>In the meantime Andy had been plying
+the whip with such precision that the foot of
+one of the wolves had been torn off and another
+wolf so badly lacerated that as it broke temporarily
+away Jamie dropped it with the rifle,
+and then shot the blind wolf which was now
+roaming aimlessly about. A stroke from Doctor
+Joe's axe dispatched the fifth animal, and the
+remaining wolf, now at the mercy of the dogs,
+was literally torn into shreds.</p>
+
+<p>Hardly five minutes had elapsed from the
+moment Jamie discovered the pack trotting out
+of the woods until the fight was ended. The
+attack had been made with such suddenness
+and such savage fierceness that Doctor Joe
+and the boys had scarcely uttered a word.</p>
+
+<p>Now there was the tangle of dogs to be
+straightened out, and Andy was compelled to
+use his whip to drive them from the dead wolves
+and quiet them. Hardly one of them had
+escaped injury from the wolf fangs, and Dick,
+a faithful old fellow, was so badly mangled
+that Andy cut him loose from the harness to
+follow the komatik home at his leisure.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><a name="Page_260a" id="Page_260a"></a></p>
+<p class="figcenter" style="width: 726px;">
+<img src="images/image005.jpg" width="726" height="500" alt="IT WAS A FIGHT TO THE DEATH" title="IT WAS A FIGHT TO THE DEATH" />
+<span class="caption">IT WAS A FIGHT TO THE DEATH</span>
+</p>
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><a name="Page_261" id="Page_261"></a>"Dick's too much hurt to do any hauling for
+a month whatever," said Andy regretfully.</p>
+
+<p>"He won't die, will he?" asked Jamie
+sympathetically.</p>
+
+<p>"He'll get over un," Andy assured.</p>
+
+<p>"The dogs had grit, now!" Jamie boasted.
+"There's nary a team in the Bay could have
+fought like that!"</p>
+
+<p>"And I noticed you had some grit too,"
+said Doctor Joe. "A wolf's fangs snapped
+within an inch of your leg, you young rascal,
+when you held the rifle against that fellow
+you shot."</p>
+
+<p>"I weren't thinkin' of that," said Jamie.</p>
+
+<p>One of the pelts was so badly torn by the
+dogs as to be valueless. The remaining carcasses
+were skinned, and the skins lashed upon the
+sledge, and as they turned homeward Andy
+remarked:</p>
+
+<p>"There's five good skins and they'll bring
+four dollars apiece whatever. 'Tweren't a bad
+hunt when we weren't huntin'."</p>
+
+<p>"You and Jamie can take the money you
+<a name="Page_262" id="Page_262"></a>get for them and start a bank account,"
+suggested Doctor Joe. "I'll send it to St.
+John's and put it in a bank for you, and then
+you'll have that test completed for both the
+second and first class. There's no doubt you've
+earned it."</p>
+
+<p>"Will you, sir? That's fine now!" exclaimed
+Andy. "Davy wasn't with us, and
+he'll have to set traps to earn his. But he'll
+get a marten or two, whatever."</p>
+
+<p>"There's no doubt about David's catching
+the martens," said Doctor Joe. "If there's a
+marten around he'll catch it."</p>
+
+<p>It was dark when they reached The Jug.
+Margaret and David were quite excited when
+they heard the story of the adventure, and
+mighty pleased with its ending.</p>
+
+<p>"'Twere a stray pack," said David, "and
+they were hungry. Pop had a pack come at
+he that way once, but they just took one of
+the dogs and ran off."</p>
+
+<p>A wonderful Christmas they had at The Jug
+that year. Doctor Joe had no end of surprises
+stowed away in mysterious boxes that he had
+brought from New York and deposited in his
+old cabin at Break Cove. He and David
+brought them over with the dogs on Christmas
+<a name="Page_263" id="Page_263"></a>eve, and on Christmas morning they were
+opened.</p>
+
+<p>The one disappointment of the day was the
+failure of Thomas to be with them. He had
+suggested at the time he departed for the Seal
+Lake trails in the autumn that he might come
+out of the wilderness for additional provisions
+at Christmas time, but it was a long and
+tedious journey, and they knew it was one
+he would hardly undertake unless pressed by
+need.</p>
+
+<p>Christmas holiday week was always one of
+celebration at the Hudson's Bay Company's
+Post. At this time trappers and Indians
+emerged from the silent wilderness to barter
+their early catch of furs and to purchase fresh
+supplies; and on New Year's eve it was
+the custom of the men and women of the
+Bay to gather at the Post for the final
+festivities. All day long sledge load after
+sledge load of jolly folk appeared to take
+part in the great New Year's eve dance, and to
+enter into the shooting contests and snowshoe
+and other races on New Year's day.</p>
+
+<p>Eli and Mark Horn drove their team in at
+The Jug just at dinner time on New Year's
+eve, and Eli invited Margaret to go on with
+<a name="Page_264" id="Page_264"></a>them and visit Kate Hodge, the daughter of
+the Post servant.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll be short of lasses at the dance, and
+we needs un all," said Eli.</p>
+
+<p>"I'd like wonderful well to go," said Margaret
+wistfully.</p>
+
+<p>"Go on," urged Doctor Joe. "You'll have
+a good time and the boys and I will make out
+famously here. You get away seldom enough
+and see too few people. 'Twill do you good,
+lass."</p>
+
+<p>"Aye, come on now!" Eli urged. "We'll
+take you over snug and warm in our komatik
+box. Kate'll be wonderful glad to see you,
+and we'll bring you back the day after New
+Year."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll go," Margaret consented, her eyes
+dancing with pleasure.</p>
+
+<p>"And there'll be no prettier lass there," said
+Doctor Joe gallantly, which brought a blush to
+Margaret's cheek and caused Eli to chuckle.</p>
+
+<p>Margaret hastened her toilet and was ready
+in a jiffy. She was all a-flutter with excitement
+when Eli tucked her in a box rigged on
+the rear of the komatik, and wrapped her
+snugly with caribou skins.</p>
+
+<p>"You must have had it in mind to capture
+<a name="Page_265" id="Page_265"></a>Margaret when you left home, Eli," Doctor
+Joe suggested with a twinkle in his eye. "Men
+don't take travelling boxes when they go alone."</p>
+
+<p>Eli grinned sheepishly as he broke the
+komatik loose, and the dogs dashed away.</p>
+
+<p>It was a dull cold day with a leaden sky,
+and snow was shifting restlessly over the ice.
+The wind was in the south-east, and as they
+entered the cabin David remarked:</p>
+
+<p>"There'll be snow before to-morrow mornin'."</p>
+
+<p>When they had eaten supper that evening
+and cleared the table David stepped out for
+a look at the weather, and returning reported:</p>
+
+<p>"'Twill be a nasty night. The snow's started
+and the wind's risin'. 'Tis wonderful frosty,
+too, for a wind."</p>
+
+<p>"Let's see how cold it is," said Doctor Joe,
+stepping out to consult his spirit thermometer.
+"Thirty-eight below zero. Frosty enough with
+a gale, and a gale's rising," he reported. "I'm
+glad we're all snug inside."</p>
+
+<p>"Tell us a story," Jamie suggested, as
+they settled themselves comfortably by the
+fire.</p>
+
+<p>"There's dogs comin'!" Andy broke in.</p>
+
+<p>David ran to the door, and a moment later
+ushered Eli Horn into the cabin.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_266" id="Page_266"></a>"What's the matter, Eli? Has anything
+happened?" asked Doctor Joe, immediately
+concerned for Margaret's safety.</p>
+
+<p>"Margaret's safe," said Eli with suppressed
+excitement. "There's murder at the Post!"</p>
+
+<p>Questions brought forth the fact that Eli
+and Margaret had reached the Post at about
+half-past three and found the people in confusion.
+Three lumbermen from Grampus River
+had come there. There had been a dispute
+among them and one of them was stabbed.
+The other two had immediately departed,
+presumably to return to the lumber camps.
+Eli did not know how seriously the man was
+injured. He had not seen him. It had
+occurred shortly before his arrival, and at
+Margaret's suggestion he had turned directly
+about and returned to The Jug to fetch Doctor
+Joe to attend the injured man.</p>
+
+<p>"My dogs is fagged," said Eli, "and 'twere
+slow comin' back."</p>
+
+<p>"David will take me over with his dogs.
+They're fresh, and will travel faster," said
+Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p>In ten minutes David was ready with the
+dogs harnessed, and the two teams drove away
+into the darkness and storm.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_267" id="Page_267"></a>Andy and Jamie were greatly excited.
+Tragedies enough happened up and down the
+coast when men were drowned or lost in the
+ice or met with fatal injuries. But never
+before in the Bay had one man been cut down
+by the hand of another. It was a ghastly
+thought, and the awfulness of it was perhaps
+accentuated by the snow dashing against the
+window panes and the wind shrieking around
+the gables of the cabin.</p>
+
+<p>It was near ten o'clock, long past their usual
+bedtime, and they were still talking, for there
+was matter enough in their brains to banish
+sleep, when the door suddenly opened and
+accompanied by the howl of the wind a snow-covered
+figure lurched in upon them.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_268" id="Page_268"></a></p>
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XXII" id="CHAPTER_XXII"></a>CHAPTER XXII</h3>
+
+<h2>THE IMMUTABLE LAW OF GOD</h2>
+
+
+<p>"Peter! 'Tis Peter Sparks!" exclaimed
+Andy with vast relief to find it was not
+a murderous lumberman.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm comin' after Doctor Joe!" gasped
+Peter, as half frozen he drew off his snow-caked
+netsek.</p>
+
+<p>"Me rub your nose, Peter. She's froze, and
+your cheeks too," broke in Andy, vigorously
+rubbing Peter's whitened nose and cheeks.</p>
+
+<p>Peter was silent perforce while Andy manipulated
+the frosted parts until circulation and
+colour were restored.</p>
+
+<p>"Come to the fire now and warm up," directed
+Andy. "What you wantin' of Doctor Joe?"</p>
+
+<p>"There's been murder done, or clost to un!"
+Peter, at last free to articulate, continued.
+"Murder at the lumber camp!"</p>
+
+<p>"Murder!" repeated Jamie, awesomely.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_269" id="Page_269"></a>"Aye, nigh to murder whatever!" Peter
+reiterated.</p>
+
+<p>"Doctor Joe's gone to the Post," said Andy.
+"Eli Horn came for he. Two of the lumber
+folk most killed another of un over there.
+Davy took Doctor Joe over."</p>
+
+<p>"And two of un most killed the boss at
+the camp," explained Peter. "They comes
+there from the Post about six o'clock and were
+packin' a flatsled with things. The boss asks
+un where they's goin'. They answers some
+way that makes he mad, and he hits one of un.
+Then they jumps at he and pounds and kicks he
+till he's like dead, and he don't come to
+again. The two men has rifles and they keeps
+all the lumbermen back, and off they goes
+with the flatsled, and they gets away."</p>
+
+<p>"Will the boss die then?" asked Jamie in
+horror.</p>
+
+<p>"With Doctor Joe gone he'll sure be dyin',"
+declared Peter desperately. "His arm is broke
+and he's broke somewhere inside, and his face
+is awful to look at, all pounded and kicked
+and bleedin'. Me and Lige goes up to sit a
+bit and hear un tell their stories, and we gets
+there just after the two men gets away. With
+Doctor Joe's teachin' we fixes the boss up the
+<a name="Page_270" id="Page_270"></a>best we can, and whilst Lige stays to help
+look after he, I comes for Doctor Joe. Pop's
+to the Post with the dogs and I has to walk,
+and facin' the wind 'twere hard. And now
+Doctor Joe's gone, the poor man'll sure die!"</p>
+
+<p>"You has wonderful grit to come!" said
+Jamie admiringly. "'Tis wonderful frosty and
+nasty outside."</p>
+
+<p>"'Twere to save the boss's life! 'Tis the
+scout law," Peter asserted stoutly. "I'll be
+goin' to the Post now for Doctor Joe."</p>
+
+<p>"You're nigh done up, Peter. You'll be
+stayin' here with Jamie. <i>I'm</i> goin' to the
+Post for Doctor Joe," declared Andy.</p>
+
+<p>"I am most done up," Peter confessed.
+"But the wind'll be in your back goin' to the
+Post. She's just startin' though, and she'll
+be a wonderful sight worse than she is now
+before you gets there. 'Twill be terrible nasty."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm goin' too," said Jamie.</p>
+
+<p>"You're not goin'," said Andy. "I'm bigger
+and I can travel faster if you're not comin'.
+'Twould be wrong to leave Peter here alone."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm <i>goin</i>!" repeated Jamie stubbornly.</p>
+
+<p>"Won't you be stayin' with me?" pleaded
+Peter. "I&mdash;I'm afeared to stay here alone
+with those two men like to come in on me."</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_271" id="Page_271"></a>"I'll stay," Jamie consented.</p>
+
+<p>A blast of wind shook the cabin.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm fearin' you can't do it, Andy! 'Twill
+soon be too much for flesh and blood out on
+the Bay!" said Peter.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis in my scout oath to do my best," said
+Andy, adjusting the hood of his sealskin netsek.
+"I'm goin', now."</p>
+
+<p>Andy closed the door behind him. It was
+pitchy dark. The snow was driving in blinding
+clouds, and he stood for a moment to catch
+his breath. Then he felt his way down across
+The Jug and out upon the Bay ice. Here the
+full force of the north-east blizzard met him.
+He staggered and choked with the first blast,
+then in a temporary lull forged ahead.</p>
+
+<p>The storm, as Peter predicted, had not reached
+its height. Each smothering blast of fury was
+stronger and fiercer than the one before it.
+Andy took advantage of the lulls, and save
+when the heavier blasts came and nearly swept
+him from his feet, maintained a steady trot.
+In the swirl of snow-clouds he could see nothing
+a foot from his nose. Once he found himself
+floundering through pressure ridges formed
+by the tide near shore. This he calculated
+was the tip of a long point jutting out into
+<a name="Page_272" id="Page_272"></a>the Bay, half-way between The Jug and the
+Post. Ten miles of the distance was behind
+him. He drew farther out upon the ice.</p>
+
+<p>There were times when Andy had to throw
+himself prone upon the ice with his face down
+and sheltered by his arms to escape suffocation.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis gettin' wonderful nasty," he said,
+"but I'll have plenty o' grit, like Jamie says,
+and with the Lord's help I'll pull through."</p>
+
+<p>Then he found himself repeating over and
+over again the prayer:</p>
+
+<p>"Dear Lord, help me through! 'Tis to save
+a life, and the scout oath! Dear Lord, help
+me through!"</p>
+
+<p>The gale had now risen to such terrific
+proportions that often he was compelled to
+crawl upon his hands and knees. With each
+momentary lull he would rise and stagger
+forward. His legs worked at these times without
+conscious effort. It was strange his legs
+should be like that. They had never felt like
+that before.</p>
+
+<p>And so, crawling, staggering upright, crawling
+again, and lying for minutes at a time with
+his face in his arms that he might breathe
+when he was well-nigh overwhelmed and
+suffocated, Andy kept on.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_273" id="Page_273"></a>He could recall little of the last hours on the
+ice. It was a confused sensation of rising
+and falling, staggering and crawling until he
+collided with an obstruction, and recognizing it
+as the jetty at the Post, his brain roused to a
+degree of consciousness, and his heart leaped
+with joy.</p>
+
+<p>With much fumbling he succeeded in donning
+his snow-shoes, which were slung upon his
+back, for the twenty yards that lay between
+the ice and the buildings was covered with deep
+drift. Once he stepped upon a dog that lay
+huddled and sleeping under the drift. It sprang
+out with a snarl and snapped at his legs. A
+hundred of the savage creatures were lying
+about in the snow.</p>
+
+<p>Day comes late in Labrador. It was still
+pitchy dark outside when Andy, at eight
+o'clock in the morning, lurched into the kitchen
+at the Post house, and fell sprawling upon the
+floor. He had been battling the storm for ten
+hours.</p>
+
+<p>David and Margaret, Eli and Mark and
+several others were there. Doctor Joe was
+at breakfast in the Factor's quarters, and
+they called him. Andy's face was covered
+with a mass of caked snow and ice. His nose
+<a name="Page_274" id="Page_274"></a>and cheeks and chin were white and badly
+frosted, and upon removing his mittens and
+moccasins, his hands and feet were found to
+be in the same condition.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. MacCreary, the factor, placed a bed at
+Doctor Joe's disposal, and when the frost had
+been removed and circulation had been restored,
+Andy was tucked into warm blankets.</p>
+
+<p>"That chap had grit," remarked Mr. MacCreary
+as he and Doctor Joe left David and
+Margaret by the bedside and Andy asleep.
+"The Angus boys are all gritty fellows. They're
+the sort the Company needs."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," Doctor Joe agreed heartily, "and
+they never shirk their duty. Andy is a Boy
+Scout, and he did what he considered his duty.
+Now I must go to the lumber camp and fix
+up that boss, if he isn't beyond fixing up."</p>
+
+<p>With the coming of dawn the wind subsided
+and the snow ceased to fall. Eli harnessed his
+dogs when it was light, and with the lumberman
+who had been stabbed, but whose injuries
+were not after all serious, he and Doctor Joe
+set out for Grampus River.</p>
+
+<p>At the lumber camp they found Lige Sparks,
+Obadiah Button and Micah Dunk installed as
+volunteer nurses. The man had a broken
+<a name="Page_275" id="Page_275"></a>arm, three broken ribs, and had suffered internal
+injuries that demanded prompt attention.</p>
+
+<p>"If Andy hadn't come for me, and if I'd
+been delayed much longer in reaching the
+camp," said Doctor Joe later, "the man would
+have died. Thanks to the boys, his life will
+be saved."</p>
+
+<p>That day and that night Doctor Joe remained
+with his patient. On the following morning it
+became necessary for him to return to The
+Jug for additional dressings and medicines.
+Eli drove him over.</p>
+
+<p>The sky was clear, and the morning was
+bitterly cold, with rime hanging like a filmy
+veil in the air and glistening like flakes of
+silver in the sunshine. Doctor Joe and Eli
+ran in turns by the side of the komatik, while
+the dogs trotted briskly.</p>
+
+<p>"What's that, now?" asked Eli, pointing
+to a black object far out on the white field of
+ice, as they approached The Jug.</p>
+
+<p>"I can't make out," said Doctor Joe after
+a long scrutiny.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll see," and Eli turned the dogs toward
+the object.</p>
+
+<p>"It looks like a flatsled," said Doctor Joe
+as they approached.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_276" id="Page_276"></a>"'Tis a flatsled," said Eli. "'Tis the men
+ran away from the lumber camp."</p>
+
+<p>A gruesome sight met them as Eli brought
+the dogs to a stop. Huddled close and lying
+by the side of the toboggan, partially covered
+by drift, were the stiff-frozen bodies of two
+men.</p>
+
+<p>"They were lost in the storm," said Eli
+presently. "They must have been wanderin'
+about till the frost got the best of un."</p>
+
+<p>Doctor Joe and Eli lifted the remains to the
+komatik, attaching the toboggan to trail behind,
+and with their ghastly burden they turned in
+at The Jug.</p>
+
+<p>Jamie and Peter, vastly concerned for Andy's
+safety, met them, and were as vastly relieved
+when they learned that Andy would be not
+much the worse for his experience, and that
+the lumber boss would live.</p>
+
+<p>The two bodies were carried into the wood-shed
+and laid side by side upon the floor,
+to remain there until evening, when Doctor
+Joe and Eli would return them to Grampus
+River for burial. It was then that Jamie
+looked for the first time upon the upturned
+dead faces, and as he did so he exclaimed,
+with horror:</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_277" id="Page_277"></a>"They's the men! They's the men that had
+the cache and tied me up!"</p>
+
+<p>"They've been hard men in life and probably
+done much evil in their day, but they're past
+it now and we'll treat their remains gently
+and humanly," said Doctor Joe as he covered
+their faces with a cloth.</p>
+
+<p>Then they undid the flatsled and carried
+the contents into the cabin, where the things
+would be safe from the dogs. There were
+provisions, a bag of clothing, two thirty-eight
+calibre rifles, a quantity of ammunition and a
+small bag, which Jamie declared was the bag
+which had been cached in the tree.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm goin' to look at un," said Eli. "'Twill
+do no harm."</p>
+
+<p>Eli undid the bag and drew forth a package
+which proved to contain a large roll of bills,
+amounting to several hundred dollars. Then
+followed two marten pelts, a red fox pelt, and
+the pelt of a beautiful silver fox. Eli shook
+the silver fox pelt, and holding it up examined
+it critically.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis Pop's silver!" he exclaimed.</p>
+
+<p>"Are you sure?" asked Doctor Joe.</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis Pop's silver! I'd know un anywheres!"
+declared Eli positively.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_278" id="Page_278"></a>"Then," said Doctor Joe, "it was not
+Indian Jake but these men who shot your father
+and stole the fur."</p>
+
+<p>"And stole our boat!" Jamie broke in
+excitedly.</p>
+
+<p>"'Twere they stole the silver," Eli admitted,
+"and the Lord punished un. I'm wonderful
+glad my bullet went abroad and didn't hurt
+Indian Jake."</p>
+
+<p>"We all thought Indian Jake guilty," said
+Doctor Joe. "How easy it is to pass judgment
+on people, and how often we misjudge
+them!"</p>
+
+<p>"And knowin' he didn't take un, and after
+I'd tried to kill he," went on Eli contritely,
+"he were wonderful good to me, havin' me
+bide to supper and givin' me deer's meat."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm rememberin'," broke in Jamie, "that
+the men were talkin' o' somethin' they were
+takin' from the ship, and fearin' the lumber
+boss would find out about un. 'Twere the
+money they means."</p>
+
+<p>There was a howl of arriving dogs outside,
+and Jamie rushed to the door to meet David
+and Andy and Margaret, and, to his unbounded
+delight, Thomas and Indian Jake.</p>
+
+<p>While Thomas was being overwhelmed by
+<a name="Page_279" id="Page_279"></a>Jamie, Indian Jake with a broad grin extended
+his hand to Eli.</p>
+
+<p>"How do, Eli?"</p>
+
+<p>"How do, Jake?" Eli took Indian Jake's
+hand. "I got the silver back, Jake, and you
+never took un. I'm wonderful sorry the way
+I done."</p>
+
+<p>"I've got your ca'tridges here, Eli," grinned
+Indian Jake. "You can have un back now."</p>
+
+<p>"But didn't Andy have grit, now!" Jamie's
+voice rose above the babel. "Didn't he have
+grit to go out in the night when 'twas <i>that</i>
+nasty! And a stout heart, too, like a man!
+Andy's a wonderful fine scout, whatever!"</p>
+
+<p>And so ended the mystery of the shooting
+and the robbery of Lem Horn, and so the guilty
+were discovered and punished, as in some
+manner and at some time all wrong-doers are
+discovered and punished. It is the immutable
+law of God.</p>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's Troop One of the Labrador, by Dillon Wallace
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TROOP ONE OF THE LABRADOR ***
+
+***** This file should be named 16048-h.htm or 16048-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+ https://www.gutenberg.org/1/6/0/4/16048/
+
+Produced by Wallace McLean, Diane Monico, and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net.
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
+paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works. See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+ the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+ you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
+ owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+ has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+ Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
+ must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+ prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+ returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+ sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+ address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+ the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+ you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+ does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+ License. You must require such a user to return or
+ destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+ and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+ Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+ money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+ electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+ of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+ distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+ Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+ Chief Executive and Director
+ gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+ https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/16048-h/images/image001.jpg b/16048-h/images/image001.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..550efe0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16048-h/images/image001.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/16048-h/images/image002.jpg b/16048-h/images/image002.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..559440d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16048-h/images/image002.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/16048-h/images/image003.jpg b/16048-h/images/image003.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..057a93c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16048-h/images/image003.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/16048-h/images/image004.jpg b/16048-h/images/image004.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..796deb0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16048-h/images/image004.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/16048-h/images/image005.jpg b/16048-h/images/image005.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4c1399c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16048-h/images/image005.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/16048-h/images/image1.png b/16048-h/images/image1.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d0b3cf2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16048-h/images/image1.png
Binary files differ